DCR-PC4E/PC5/PC5E RMT-809/811/812

US Model
SERVICE MANUAL Ver 1.0 2000. 05
Canadian Model
Korea Model
Level 2 DCR-PC5
AEP Model
UK Model
DCR-PC4E/PC5E
Australian Model
Chinese Model
DCR-PC5E
E Model
Hong Kong Model
Photo : DCR-PC5 (GRAY)
Tourist Model
RMT-811 DCR-PC5/PC5E
J MECHANISM

On the VC-245 board For MECHANISM ADJUSTMENTS, refer to the

This service manual provides the information that is premised the “DV MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT MANUAL
circuit board replacement service and not intended repair inside the J MECHANISM ” (9-929-807-11).
VC-245 board.
Therefore, schematic diagram, printed wiring board and electrical parts DCR-PC5 : NTSC model
list of the VC-245 board are not shown. DCR-PC4E/PC5E : PAL model
The following pages are not shown.
Schematic diagram .......................... Pages 4-17 to 4-54
Printed wiring board ......................... Pages 4-55 to 4-58
Electrical parts list ............................ Pages 6-13 to 6-25 • Table showing differences is shown on page 3.

SPECIFICATIONS

— Continued on next page —

DIGITAL VIDEO CAMERA RECORDER

 • SUPPLIED ACCESSORIES
Check that the following accessories are supplied with your
camcorder.

SAFETY-RELATED COMPONENT WARNING!! ATTENTION AU COMPOSANT AYANT RAPPORT

À LA SÉCURITÉ!
COMPONENTS IDENTIFIED BY MARK 0 OR DOTTED LINE WITH LES COMPOSANTS IDENTIFÉS PAR UNE MARQUE 0 SUR LES
MARK 0 ON THE SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS AND IN THE PARTS DIAGRAMMES SCHÉMATIQUES ET LA LISTE DES PIÈCES SONT
LIST ARE CRITICAL TO SAFE OPERATION. REPLACE THESE CRITIQUES POUR LA SÉCURITÉ DE FONCTIONNEMENT. NE
COMPONENTS WITH SONY PARTS WHOSE PART NUMBERS REMPLACER CES COMPOSANTS QUE PAR DES PIÈSES SONY
APPEAR AS SHOWN IN THIS MANUAL OR IN SUPPLEMENTS DONT LES NUMÉROS SONT DONNÉS DANS CE MANUEL OU
PUBLISHED BY SONY. DANS LES SUPPÉMENTS PUBLIÉS PAR SONY.

SAFETY CHECK-OUT

After correcting the original service problem, perform the following

safety checks before releasing the set to the customer.

1. Check the area of your repair for unsoldered or poorly-soldered 4. Look for parts which, through functioning, show obvious signs
connections. Check the entire board surface for solder splashes of deterioration. Point them out to the customer and
and bridges. recommend their replacement.
2. Check the interboard wiring to ensure that no wires are 5. Check the B+ voltage to see it is at the values specified.
"pinched" or contact high-wattage resistors. 6. Flexible Circuit Board Repairing
3. Look for unauthorized replacement parts, particularly • Keep the temperature of the soldering iron around 270˚C
transistors, that were installed during a previous repair. Point during repairing.
them out to the customer and recommend their replacement. • Do not touch the soldering iron on the same conductor of the
circuit board (within 3 times).
• Be careful not to apply force on the conductor when soldering
or unsoldering.

—2—
Table for differences of function
Model DCR-PC4E DCR-PC5 DCR-PC5E DCR-PC5E Remark
Destination AEP, UK US, CND, E, AEP, UK E, AUS, HK,
HK, KR, JE CN, JE
Color system PAL NTSC PAL PAL
Remote commander RMT-809 RMT-811 RMT-812 RMT-811
Digital zoom 40 × 120 × 40 × 120 ×
MEMORY STICK slot ✕ a a a
DIGITAL I/O a: with IC1402 to IC1407 of VC-245 board.
✕ a a a
(RS232C)
LINE IN ✕ a ✕ a a: with REC button and IC903 of VC-245 board.
EVF (pixel) 113 K 180 K 180 K 180 K
Abbreviation
CND: Canadian mode
HK: Hong Kong model
AUS: Austrarian model
CN: Chinese model
JE: Tourist model
KR: Korea model

—3—
 TABLE OF CONTENTS
SERVICE NOTE Superimposing a still picture in the “Memory Stick”
1. POWER SUPPLY DURING REPAIRS ····························· 7 on a moving picture –MEMORY MIX ································ 1-30
2. TO TAKE OUT A CASSETTE WHEN NOT EJECT Recording an image from a mini DV tape as a still image ·· 1-32
(FORCE EJECT) ································································ 7 Copying still images from a mini DV tape –Photo save ······ 1-32
Viewing a still picture –Memory photo playback ················ 1-33
SELF-DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION Enlarging still images recorded on “Memory Stick”s
1. SELF-DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION ······································· 8 –Memory PB ZOOM ··························································· 1-34
2. SELF-DIAGNOSIS DISPLAY ·········································· 8 Playing back images continuously – SLIDE SHOW ··········· 1-34
3. SERVICE MODE DISPLAY ············································· 8 Preventing accidental erasure –Image protection ················ 1-35
3-1. Display Method ·································································· 8 Deleting images ··································································· 1-35
3-2. Backup No. ········································································· 8 Writing a print mark –PRINT MARK ································· 1-36
3-3. End of Display ···································································· 8 Additional Information ···························································· 1-36
4. SELF-DIAGNOSIS CODE TABLE ··································· 9 Using the viewfinder ···························································· 1-36
Usable cassettes ··································································· 1-36
1. GENERAL About i.LINK ······································································· 1-37
Checking supplied accessories ·················································· 1-1 Troubleshooting ··································································· 1-38
Quick Start Guide ······································································ 1-1 Self-diagnosis display ·························································· 1-39
Getting started ··········································································· 1-2 Warning indicators and messages ········································ 1-39
Using this manual ·································································· 1-2 Using your camcorder abroad ·············································· 1-40
Step 1 Preparing the power supply ········································ 1-2 Maintenance information and precautions ··························· 1-40
Charging the battery pack ···················································· 1-2 Quick Reference ······································································ 1-42
Installing the battery pack ···················································· 1-3 Identifying the parts and controls ········································ 1-42
Connecting to the mains ······················································ 1-4 Quick Function Guide ························································· 1-44
Step 2 Inserting a cassette ······················································ 1-4
Step 3 Using a touch panel ···················································· 1-4 2. DISASSEMBLY
Recording –Basics ····································································· 1-5 2-1. LCD UNIT, PD-126 BOARD ········································· 2-2
Recording a picture ································································ 1-5 2-2. CABINET (R) BLOCK ASSEMBLY-1 ·························· 2-3
Shooting backlit subjects (BACK LIGHT) ·························· 1-6 2-3. CABINET (R) BLOCK ASSEMBLY-2 ·························· 2-4
Shooting in the dark (NightShot/Super NightShot) ············· 1-7 2-4. BJ-1 BOARD ··································································· 2-4
Self-timer recording ····························································· 1-7 2-5. LENS-EVF BLOCK ASSEMBLY ·································· 2-5
END SEARCH ···································································· 1-7 2-6. MICROPHONE BLOCK, SPEAKER ···························· 2-5
Playback –Basics ······································································· 1-8 2-7. VC-245 BOARD ····························································· 2-6
Playing back a tape ································································ 1-8 2-8. MECHANISM DECK ····················································· 2-6
Viewing the recording on TV ················································ 1-9 2-9. CF-75 BOARD, LENS DEVICE (LSV-651B) ··············· 2-7
Advanced Recording Operations ············································· 1-10 2-10. HEADPHONE JACK, S TERMINAL,
Recording a still image on a tape –Tape Photo recording ··· 1-10 LITHIUM BATTERY, MEMORY STICK
Adjusting the white balance manually ································· 1-11 CONNECTOR (PC5/PC5E MODEL) ···························· 2-8
Using the wide mode ··························································· 1-11 2-11. NS-12 BOARD, CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK
Using the fader function ······················································ 1-11 (PS-30350), CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK (FK-30350) ·· 2-9
Using special effects –Picture effect ···································· 1-12 2-12. LCD HINGE ASSEMBLY ············································ 2-11
Using special effects –Digital effect ···································· 1-13 2-13. ATTACHING HARNESSES OF THE LCD HINGE
Using the PROGRAM AE function ····································· 1-13 ASSEMBLY ·································································· 2-12
Adjusting the exposure manually ········································ 1-14 2-14. CIRCUIT BOARDS LOCATION ································· 2-13
Using the spot light-metering mode – Flexible Spot Meter ··· 1-14 2-15. FLEXIBLE BOARDS LOCATION ······························ 2-14
Focusing manually ······························································· 1-15
Advanced Playback Operations ··············································· 1-15 3. BLOCK DIAGRAMS
Playing back a tape with picture effects ······························ 1-15 3-1. OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM (1/3)(DCR-PC4E) ······ 3-1
Playing back a tape with digital effects ······························· 1-16 3-2. OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM (1/3)(DCR-PC5/PC5E) · 3-3
Enlarging images recorded on tapes – PB ZOOM ·············· 1-16 3-3. OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM (2/3) ··························· 3-5
Quickly locating a scene using the zero set memory function ·· 1-16 3-4. OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM (3/3) ··························· 3-7
Searching the boundaries of recorded tape by title 3-5. POWER BLOCK DIAGRAM (1/2) ································ 3-9
–Title search ········································································· 1-17 3-6. POWER BLOCK DIAGRAM (2/2) ······························ 3-11
Searching a recording by date –Date search ························ 1-17
Searching for a photo –Photo search/Photo scan ················· 1-18 4. PRINTED WIRING BOARDS AND
Editing ····················································································· 1-19 SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS
Dubbing a tape ····································································· 1-19 4-1. FRAME SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM (1/2) ······················· 4-1
Dubbing only desired scenes –Digital program editing ······ 1-19 FRAME SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM (2/2) ······················· 4-3
Audio dubbing ····································································· 1-22 4-2. PRINTED WIRING BOARDS AND
Superimposing a title ··························································· 1-23 SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS ············································ 4-5
Making your own titles ························································ 1-24 • CF-75 (CCD IMAGER)
Labeling a cassette ······························································· 1-25 PRINTED WIRING BOARD ························· 4-7
Customizing Your Camcorder ················································· 1-25 • NS-12 (REMOTE COMMANDER RECEIVER)
Changing the menu settings ················································· 1-25 PRINTED WIRING BOARD ······················· 4-11
Resetting the date and time ·················································· 1-27 • CF-75 (CCD IMAGER)(1/2),
“Memory Stick” Operations (DCR-PC5/PC5E only) ············· 1-27 NS-12 (REMOTE COMMANDER RECEIVER)
Using a “Memory Stick” –introduction ······························· 1-27 SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ···························· 4-13
Recording still images on “Memory Stick” • CF-75 (PITCH, YAW SENSOR)(2/2)
–Memory photo recording ··················································· 1-29 SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ···························· 4-15

—4—
 Shematic diagram and printed wiring board of the 5-1. Flange Back Adjustment (1) ·········································· 5-19
VC-245 board are not shown. 5-2. Flange Back Adjustment (2) ·········································· 5-19
Pages from 4-17 to 4-58 are not shown. 6. Flange Back Check ························································ 5-20
7. Optical Axis Adjustment ··············································· 5-21
• PO-5 (PANEL OPEN), PR-34 (PANEL REVERSE) 8. Picture Frame Setting ···················································· 5-22
PRINTED WIRING BOARDS ····················· 4-60 9. Color Reproduction Adjustment ···································· 5-23
• PO-5 (PANEL OPEN), PR-34 (PANEL REVERSE) 10. MAX GAIN Adjustment ··············································· 5-24
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ···························· 4-60 11. Auto White Balance & LV Standard Data Input ··········· 5-24
• FP-100 (MODE SWITCH). FP-228 (DEW SENSOR), 12. Auto White Balance Adjustment ··································· 5-25
FP-102 (TAPE TOP/END SENSOR, S/T REEL) 13. White Balance Check ···················································· 5-26
FLEXIBLE BOARDS AND 14. Mechanical Shutter Adjustment (DCR-PC5/PC5E) ······ 5-27
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ···························· 4-61 15. Steady Shot Check ························································· 5-27
• CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK (FK-30350) 1-4. COLOR ELECTRONIC VIEWFINDER SYSTEM
PRINTED WIRING BOARD ······················· 4-63 ADJUSTMENT ····························································· 5-28
• CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK (FK-30350) 1. VCO Adjustment (VC-245 board) ································ 5-28
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ···························· 4-65 2. Bright Adjustment (VC-245 board) ······························· 5-29
• BJ-1 (JACK, BATTERY) 3. Contrast Adjustment (VC-245 board) ··························· 5-29
PRINTED WIRING BOARD ······················· 4-67 4. White Balance Adjustment (VC-245 board) ················· 5-30
• BJ-1 (JACK, BATTERY) 1-5. LCD SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT ··································· 5-31
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ···························· 4-69 1. VCO Adjustment (PD-126 board) ································· 5-31
• PD-126 (LCD DRIVE) 2. Bright Adjustment (PD-126 board) ······························· 5-32
PRINTED WIRING BOARD ······················· 4-71 3. Black Limit Adjustment (PD-126 board) ······················ 5-32
• PD-126 (LCD DRIVE)(1/2) 4. Contrast Adjustment (PD-126 board) ···························· 5-33
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ···························· 4-73 5. Center Level Adjustment (PD-126 board) ····················· 5-33
• PD-126 (LCD DRIVE)(2/2) 6. V-COM Adjustment (PD-126 board) ···························· 5-34
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ···························· 4-75 7. White Balance Adjustment (PD-126 board) ·················· 5-34
4-3. WAVEFORMS ······························································ 4-77 5-2. MECHANISM SECTION ADJUSTMENT ·················· 5-35
4-4. MOUNTED PARTS LOCATION ································· 4-82 2-1. HOW TO ENTER RECORD MODE WITHOUT
CASSETTE ··································································· 5-35
5. ADJUSTMENTS 2-2. HOW TO ENTER PLAYBACK MODE WITHOUT
1. Before starting adjustment ··············································· 5-1 CASSETTE ··································································· 5-35
1-1. Adjusting items when replacing main parts and boards. ··· 5-2 2-3. TAPE PATH ADJUSTMENT ········································ 5-35
5-1. CAMERA SECTION ADJUSTMENT ··························· 5-4 1. Preparation for Adjustment ··········································· 5-35
1-1. PREPARATIONS BEFORE ADJUSTMENT 2. Procedure after operations ············································· 5-35
(CAMERA SECTION) ··················································· 5-4 5-3. VIDEO SECTION ADJUSTMENTS ··························· 5-36
1-1-1. List of Service Tools ························································ 5-4 3-1. PREPARATIONS BEFORE ADJUSTMENTS ············ 5-36
1-1-2. Preparations ····································································· 5-5 3-1-1. Equipment Required ······················································ 5-36
1-1-3. Precaution ········································································ 5-7 3-1-2. Precautions on Adjusting ··············································· 5-37
1. Setting the Switch ···························································· 5-7 3-1-3. Adjusting Connectors ···················································· 5-38
2. Order of Adjustments ······················································ 5-7 3-1-4. Connecting the Equipment ············································ 5-38
3. Subjects ··········································································· 5-7 3-1-5. Alignment Tapes ···························································· 5-39
1-2. INITIALIZATION OF B, C, D, E, F, 7, 8 PAGE DATA ··· 5-8 3-1-6. Input/Output Level and Impedance ······························· 5-39
1-2-1. INITIALIZATION OF C, D, 8 PAGE DATA ·················· 5-8 3-2. SYSTEM CONTROL SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT ········ 5-40
1. Initializing the C, D, 8 Page Data ···································· 5-8 1. Initialization of B, C, D, E, F, 7, 8 Page Data ··············· 5-40
2. Modification of C, D, 8 Page Data ·································· 5-8 2. Serial No. Input ····························································· 5-40
3. C Page Table ···································································· 5-8 2-1. Company ID Input ························································· 5-40
4. D Page Table ·································································· 5-10 2-2. Serial No. Input ····························································· 5-40
5. 8 Page Table ··································································· 5-11 3. Touch Panel Adjustment (VC-245 board) ····················· 5-42
1-2-2. INITIALIZATION OF B PAGE DATA 4. Battery End Check (VC-245 board) ······························ 5-42
(DCR-PC5/PC5E) ························································· 5-12 3-3. SERVO AND RF SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT ··············· 5-43
1. Initializing the B Page Data ··········································· 5-12 1. Cap FG Duty Adjustment (VC-245 Board) ··················· 5-43
2. Modification of B Page Data ········································· 5-12 2. PLL f0 & LPF f0 Adjustment (VC-245 Board) ·············· 5-43
3. B Page Table ·································································· 5-12 3. Switching Position Adjustment (VC-245 Board) ·········· 5-44
1-2-3. INITIALIZATION OF E, F, 7 PAGE DATA ················· 5-13 4. AGC Center Level and APC & AEQ Adjustment ········· 5-44
1. Initializing the E, F, 7 Page Data ··································· 5-13 4-1. Preparations before adjustments ···································· 5-44
2. Modification of E, F, 7 Page Data ································· 5-13 4-2. AGC Center Level Adjustment (VC-245 Board) ·········· 5-44
3. F Page Table ·································································· 5-13 4-3. APC & AEQ Adjustment (VC-245 Board) ··················· 5-45
4. E Page Table ·································································· 5-14 4-4. Processing after Completing Adjustments ···················· 5-45
5. 7 Page Table ··································································· 5-15 3-4. VIDEO SYSTEM ADJUSTMENTS ····························· 5-46
1-3. CAMERA SYSTEM ADJUSTMENTS ························ 5-16 3-4-1. Base Band Block Adjustments ······································ 5-46
1. 36MHz Origin Oscillation Adjustment (VC-245 board) ·· 5-16 1. Chroma BPF f0 Adjustment (VC-245 Board) ················ 5-46
2. Zoom Key Center Adjustment ······································· 5-16 2. S VIDEO OUT Y Level Adjustment (VC-245 Board) ·· 5-46
3. HALL Adjustment ························································· 5-17 3. S VIDEO OUT Chroma Level Adjustment
4. Flange Back Adjustment (Using Minipattern Box) ······· 5-18 (VC-245 Board) ····························································· 5-47
5. Flange Back Adjustment 4. VIDEO OUT Y, Chroma Level Check (VC-245 Board) ·· 5-47
(Using Flange Back Adjustment Chart and 3-4-2. BIST Check ·································································· 5-48
Subject More Than 500m Away) ··································· 5-19 1. Playback System Check ················································ 5-48

—5—
1-1. Preparations for Playback ·············································· 5-48
1-2. IC301 TRX (RF) PB BIST Check ································· 5-48
1-3. IC301 AUD (ABUS) PB BIST Check ··························· 5-48
1-4. IC301 VFD PB BIST Check ········································· 5-48
1-5. IC301 ENCODER BIST Check ···································· 5-50
1-6. Processing after Completing Playback System Check ·· 5-51
2. Recording System Check ·············································· 5-52
2-1. Preparations for recording ············································· 5-52
2-2. IC301 TRX (RF) REC BIST Check ····························· 5-52
2-3. Processing after Completing Recording System Check ·· 5-52
3-5. AUDIO SYSTEM ADJUSTMENTS ···························· 5-53
1. Playback Level Check ··················································· 5-54
2. Overall Level Characteristics Check ····························· 5-54
3. Overall Distortion Check ··············································· 5-54
4. Overall Noise Level Check ············································ 5-54
5. Overall Separation Check ·············································· 5-54
5-4. SERVICE MODE ·························································· 5-55
4-1. ADJUSTMENT REMOTE COMMANDER ················ 5-55
1. Using the adjustment remote commander ····················· 5-55
2. Precautions upon using the adjustment remote
commander ···································································· 5-55
4-2. DATA PROCESS ··························································· 5-56
4-3. SERVICE MODE ·························································· 5-57
1. Setting the Test Mode ···················································· 5-57
2. Emergence Memory Address ········································ 5-57
2-1. EMG Code (Emergency Code) ····································· 5-57
2-2. MSW Code ···································································· 5-58
3. Bit value discrimination ················································ 5-59
4. Switch check (1) ···························································· 5-59
5. Switch check (2) ···························································· 5-60
6. Record of Use check ······················································ 5-60
7. Record of Self-diagnosis check ····································· 5-61

6. REPAIR PARTS LIST

6-1. EXPLODED VIEWS ······················································ 6-1
6-1-1. OVERALL SECTION ····················································· 6-1
6-1-2. CABINET (R) BLOCK ASSEMBLY-1 ·························· 6-2
6-1-3. CABINET (R) BLOCK ASSEMBLY-2 ·························· 6-3
6-1-4. LENS-EVF SECTION ···················································· 6-4
6-1-5. CABINET (L) SECTION ················································ 6-5
6-1-6. CASSETTE COMPARTMENT AND DRUM BLOCK
ASSEMBLY ···································································· 6-6
6-1-7. LS CHASSIS BLOCK ASSEMBLY ······························· 6-7
6-1-8. MECHANISM CHASSIS BLOCK ASSEMBLY ··········· 6-8
6-2. ELECTRICAL PARTS LIST ·········································· 6-9

Parts list of the VC-245 board are not shown.

Pages from 6-13 to 6-25 are not shown.

* Optical axis frame and color reproduction frame are

shown on page 198 to 199.

—6—
 SERVICE NOTE

1. POWER SUPPLY DURING REPAIRS

In this unit, about 10 seconds after power is supplied to the battery terminal using the regulated power supply (4.2V), the power is shut off so
that the unit cannot operate.
This following two methods are available to prevent this. Take note of which to use during repairs.

Method 1.
Connect the servicing remote commander RM-95 (J-6082-053-B) to the LANC jack, and set the commander switch to the "ADJ" side.

Method 2.
Use the AC power adaptor (AC-VF10 or AC-VQ11) and connecting cord (DK-115).

2. TO TAKE OUT A CASSETTE WHEN NOT EJECT (FORCE EJECT)

1 Refer to 2-2 to remove the accessory shoe.
2 Refer to 2-2, 2-3 to remove the cabinet (R) assembly.
3 Refer to 2-5 to remove the lens-EVF block assembly.
4 Refer to 2-7 to remove VC-245 board.
5 Refer to 2-8 to remove the mechanism deck.
6 Supply +4.5V from the DC power supply to the loading motor and unload with a pressing the cassette compartment.

DC power supply
(+4.5Vdc)

: Unloading
: Loading

Loading motor

—7—
 SELF-DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION

1. SELF-DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION 2. SELF-DIAGNOSIS DISPLAY

When problems occur while the unit is operating, the self-diagnosis When problems occur while the unit is operating, the counter of the
function starts working, and displays on the viewfinder or LCD viewfinder or LCD screen consists of an alphabet and 4-digit
screen what to do. This function consists of two display; self- numbers, which blinks at 3.2 Hz. This 5-character display indicates
diagnosis display and service mode display. the “repaired by:”, “block” in which the problem occurred, and
Details of the self-diagnosis functions are provided in the Instruction “detailed code” of the problem.
manual.
Viewfinder or LCD screen
C:31:11

Blinks at 3.2Hz

C 31 11

Repaired by: Block Detailed Code

C : Corrected by customer Indicates the appropriate Refer to page 9.
H : Corrected by dealer step to be taken. Self-diagnosis Code Table.
E : Corrected by service E.g.
engineer 31 ....Reload the tape.
32 ....Turn on power again.

3. SERVICE MODE DISPLAY

The service mode display shows the last self-diagnosis codes shown in the past.

3-1. Display Method

While pressing the “BACK LIGHT” key, set the switch from OFF to “VCR or PLAYER”, and continue pressing the “BACK LIGHT” key for
5 seconds continuously. The service mode will be displayed, and the counter will show the backup No. and the 5-character self-diagnosis
codes.
Viewfinder or LCD screen
[3] C : 3 1 : 1 1

Lights up

[3] C:31:11

Backup No. Self-diagnosis Codes

Order of previous errors

3-2. Backup No.

The backup No. in the [] indicates the order in which the problem occurred. (If the number of problems which occurred is less than 6, only the
number of problems which occurred will be shown.)
[1] : Occurred first time [4] : Occurred fourth time
[2] : Occurred second time [5] : Occurred fifth time
[3] : Occurred third time [6] : Occurred the last time
Note: Switching of the backup No. can’t be done.

3-3. End of Display

Turning OFF the power supply will end the service mode display.
Note: The “self-diagnosis display” data will be backed up by the coin-type lithium battery of control switch block (FK-30350) BT4001. When this coin-
type lithium battery is removed, the “self-diagnosis display” data will be lost by initialization.

—8—
4. SELF-DIAGNOSIS CODE TABLE
Self-diagnosis Code
Repaired by:

Block Detailed Symptom/State Correction

Function Code

C 0 4 0 0 Non-standard battery is used. Use the info LITHIUM battery.

C 2 1 0 0 Condensation. Remove the cassette, and insert it again after one hour.
C 2 2 0 0 Video head is dirty. Clean with the optional cleaning cassette.
LOAD direction. Loading does not
C 3 1 1 0 complete within specified time Load the tape again, and perform operations from the beginning.
UNLOAD direction. Loading does not
C 3 1 1 1 complete within specified time Load the tape again, and perform operations from the beginning.
C 3 1 2 0 T reel side tape slacking when unloading. Load the tape again, and perform operations from the beginning.
Winding S reel fault when counting the
C 3 1 2 1 rest of tape. Load the tape again, and perform operations from the beginning.
C 3 1 2 2 T reel fault. Load the tape again, and perform operations from the beginning.
C 3 1 2 3 S reel fault. Load the tape again, and perform operations from the beginning.
C 3 1 2 4 T reel fault. Load the tape again, and perform operations from the beginning.
C 3 1 3 0 FG fault when starting capstan. Load the tape again, and perform operations from the beginning.
C 3 1 4 0 FG fault when starting drum. Load the tape again, and perform operations from the beginning.
C 3 1 4 2 FG fault during normal drum operations. Load the tape again, and perform operations from the beginning.
LOAD direction loading motor time- Remove the battery or power cable, connect, and perform
C 3 1 1 0 out. operations from the beginning.
UNLOAD direction loading motor Remove the battery or power cable, connect, and perform
C 3 1 1 1 time-out. operations from the beginning.
T reel side tape slacking when Remove the battery or power cable, connect, and perform
C 3 2 2 0 unloading. operations from the beginning.
Winding S reel fault when counting the Remove the battery or power cable, connect, and perform
C 3 2 2 1 rest of tape. operations from the beginning.
Remove the battery or power cable, connect, and perform
C 3 2 2 2 T reel fault. operations from the beginning.
Remove the battery or power cable, connect, and perform
C 3 2 2 3 S reel fault. operations from the beginning.
Remove the battery or power cable, connect, and perform
C 3 2 2 4 T reel fault. operations from the beginning.
Remove the battery or power cable, connect, and perform
C 3 2 3 0 FG fault when starting capstan. operations from the beginning.
Remove the battery or power cable, connect, and perform
C 3 2 4 0 FG fault when starting drum operations from the beginning.
FG fault during normal drum Remove the battery or power cable, connect, and perform
C 3 2 4 2 operations operations from the beginning.
Inspect the lens block focus reset sensor (Pin 7 of CF-75 board)
Difficult to adjust focus when focusing is performed when the control dial is rotated in the
E 6 1 0 0 (Cannot initialize focus.) focus manual mode, and the focus motor drive circuit (IC204 of
VC-245 board) when the focusing is not performed.
Inspect the lens block zoom reset sensor (Pin w; of CF-75 board)
Zoom operations fault when zooming is performed when the zoom lens is operated and
E 6 1 1 0 (Cannot initialize zoom lens.) the zoom motor drive circuit (IC204 of VC-245 board) when
zooming is not performed.
Steadyshot function does not work well.
E 6 2 0 0 (With pitch angular velocity sensor output Inspect pitch angular velocity sensor (SE3450 of CF-75 board)
stopped.) peripheral circuits.
Steadyshot function does not work well.
E 6 2 0 1 (With yaw angular velocity sensor output Inspect yaw angular velocity sensor (SE3451 of CF-75 board)
stopped.) peripheral circuits.

—9—
 DCR-PC4E/PC5/PC5E
SECTION 1
This section is extracted from instruction
GENERAL manual. (DCR-PC4E/PC5E model)

1-1
1-2
1-3
1-4
1-5
1-6
1-7
1-8
1-9
1-10
1-11
1-12
1-13
1-14
1-15
1-16
1-17
1-18
1-19
1-20
1-21
1-22
1-23
1-24
1-25
1-26
1-27
1-28
1-29
1-30
1-31
1-32
1-33
1-34
1-35
1-36
1-37
1-38
1-39
1-40
1-41
1-42
1-43
1-44E
 DCR-PC4E/PC5/PC5E
SECTION 2
DISASSEMBLY
The following flow chart shows the disassembly procedure.

2-1. LCD unit, PD-126 board PD-126 board service position

2-2. Cabinet (R) block assembly-1 Service position (Mainly for adjustment)

2-3. Cabinet (R) block assembly-2

2-4. BJ-1 board

2-5. Lens-EVF block assembly 2-9. CF-75 board, Lens device (LSV-651B)
DCR-PC4E/PC5/PC5E

2-6. Microphone block, Speaker

2-7. VC-245 board

2-8. Mechanism deck

2-10. Headphone jack , S terminal, Lithium battery,

Memory stick connector (PC5/PC5E model)

2-11. NS-12 board, Control switch block (PS-30350), Service position

Control switch block (FK-30350) (Mainly for voltage measurement and check)

2-12. LCD hinge assembly

2-13. Attaching harnesses of the LCD hinge assembly

2-1
NOTE: Follow the disassembly procedure in the numerical order given.
2-1. LCD UNIT, PD-126 BOARD
REMOVING THE PD-126 BOARD, 2 LCD cabinet (R)
assembly 1 Two screws (M1.7 × 2.5),
INVERTER TRANSFORMER UNIT lock ace, p2
4 Back light
Cold cathode 0 Screw (M1.7 × 2.5),
fluorescent tube 3 Remove the A
lock ace, p2
three solderings
8 Inverter 7 Remove the
transformer unit six solderings
B

2 LCD unit 9 PD-126 board

(24P)
6
-12
PD oard
1 Touch panel -12
6 B
PD oard qd PD-126 board,
(TP-30350)(7P) B
Inverter
transformer unit
4 Two screws
5 PCB clip 6 PCB clip (M1.7 × 2.5),
lock ace, p2

qa Two claws qs Back light

Cold cathode fluorescent tube,
BL shield sheet (N)

7 Panel spacer
9 LCD unit

8 Touch panel (TP-30350)

3 Two screws (M1.7 × 2.5),

5 Panel protection sheet A lock ace, p2

B
6 LCD cabinet (T)
assembly

[PD-126 BOARD SERVICE POSITION]

Adjustment remote
commander (RM-95)

LANC
Touch panel (TP-30350) jack

6
-12
PD oard
B

LCD unit
PD-126 board,
Inverter transformer unit
Back light
AC POWER
Cold cathode fluorescent tube, ADAPTOR
BL shield sheet (N) (4.2Vdc) AC IN
(AC-VF10)
(AC-VQ11)

2-2
2-2. CABINET (R) BLOCK ASSEMBLY-1

1 Two screws
(+K M2 × 5)
2 Accessory shoe

3 MIC cover

4 Two screws (M1.7 × 2.5), 8 Cabinet (R) block assembly

lock ace, p2 When removing it, be careful not
to damage the harnesses, etc.

5 Screw (M1.7 × 2.5),

lock ace, p2

45
-2
VCard
Bo
A
7 Push the eject knob in
B the direction of the arrow,
A and open the cassette lid.
B

6 Screw (M1.7 × 4),

lock ace, p2

[SERVICE POSITION (Mainly for adjustment)]

Adjustment remote
commander (RM-95)

AC POWER
ADAPTOR
AC IN (4.2Vdc)
(AC-VF10) CPC-6 terminal board jig
(AC-VQ11) (J-6082-371-A)

CPC-6 flexible jig

(J-6082-370-B)

2-3
2-3. CABINET (R) BLOCK ASSEMBLY-2

2 Harness
(PR-062) (8P) 4 Cabinet (R) block assembly
1 Harness
45 (PD-109) (14P)
-2
VCard
Bo

A
A B
B

3 BJ-1 board (60P)

2-4. BJ-1 BOARD

REMOVING THE BJ-1 BOARD

1 Remove the
three solderings

2 Battery holder,
Battery terminal board

3 BT cushion 3 BJ-1 board

9 Battery holder,
5 Screw (M1.7 × 2.5), Battery terminal board
lock ace, p2
6 Screw (M1.7 × 2.5),
lock ace, p2
4 Two screws
(M1.7 × 2.5),
lock ace, p2

1 Open the Jack cover

in the direction of the arrow.

8 BJ-1 board

7 Harness 2 Screw (M1.7 × 2.5),

(PR-062) (2P) lock ace, p2

2-4
2-5. LENS-EVF BLOCK ASSEMBLY

PRECAUTION DURING INSTALLATION

B

When installing, align the groove A of the

3 Screw (M1.7 × 2.5), lens-EVF block assembly and the portion
lock ace, p2 B of the cabinet (L) assembly as shown.

4 Lens-EVF block assembly

2 NS-12 board (8P)

45
-2
VCard
Bo

1 CF-75 board (88P)

2-6. MICROPHONE BLOCK, SPEAKER

3 Microphone block

2 Speaker retainer assembly

1 Two screws (M1.7 × 2.5),

45 lock ace, p2
-2
VCard
Bo

1 Remove the
two solderings
3 Speaker

REMOVING THE SPEAKER

2-5
2-7. VC-245 BOARD

REMOVING THE VC-245 BOARD

VC-245 board

Two claws

2 Remove the VC-245 board

in the direction of the arrow.
4 Flexible board (from capstan motor) (27P)
5 FP-102 flexible board (27P)
6 Flexible board (from video head) (10P)
7 Flexible board (from drum motor) (10P)
3 Control switch block
8 VC-245 (FK-30350) (39P)
board

45
-2 45
VCard -2
Bo VCard
Bo

1 Three screws (M1.7 × 2.5),

lock ace, p2

2-8. MECHANISM DECK

3 Open the cabinet (G) assembly,

MD frame assembly in the
direction of the arrow A. REMOVING THE CASSETTE
COMPARTMENT COVER
1 Two screws (M1.7 × 2.5),
lock ace, p2
3 Mechanism deck
2 Two screws
(M1.4 × 1.5)

B
A

2 Cassette
1 Two screws compartment cover
(M1.4 × 1.5)

4 Two dowels

5 Remove the mechanism deck, Cassette compartment

cover in the direction of the arrow B.
(Be careful not to damage the mechanism deck´s flexible.)

2-6
2-9. CF-75 BOARD, LENS DEVICE (LSV-651B)
Note: Be careful that dust must not enter during re-assembly.

REMOVING THE VF LENS ASSEMBLY

3 VF lens assembly

3 Screw (M1.7 × 2.5), 2 Screw (M1.7 × 3),

lock ace, p2 lock ace, p2

4 VF regulation
ring assembly
2 Screw (M1.7 × 2.5),
lock ace, p2 1 Screw (M1.7 × 3),
5 VF sleeve lock ace, p2

4 Tapping screw
(M1.7 × 4), p2

4 LCD
cushion
2 BL cushion (B), BL unit, BL cushion (L),
Light guide plate block, CF-75 Board

5 VF sleeve guide assembly

3 LCD (LCX032AK-J) (PC4E) (16P)

LCD (LCX033AK-J) (PC5/PC5E) (16P)

1 Two claws

2 claw
5 BL cushion (B) 6 BL cushion (L)
1 Two claws
7 BL unit
8 Two screws (M1.7 × 2.5),
lock ace, p2 A
3 Light guide plate block
Remove by sliding in the
direction of the arrow A.
1 Two tapping screws
4 Light guide (M1.7 × 5), p2
plate block (6P)
9 CF-75 Board
7 Seal rubber
(W) 2 CD frame

6 CF-75 Board
8 Optical filter block
(OFB-04-14)
qd Lens device
(LSV-651B)
5 Screw (M1.7 × 2.5),
lock ace, p2
4 Tapping screw
(M1.7 × 4), p2
qs Zoom motor
3 CF insulating sheet
0 Forcus motor
9 Two tapping screws
(M1.7 × 4), p2
qa Two tapping screws
(M1.7 × 4), p2

2-7
2-10.HEADPHONE JACK, S TERMINAL, LITHIUM BATTERY,
MEMORY STICK CONNECTOR (PC5/PC5E MODEL)

3 Special head
screw (M2.6), 6 Cabinet (G) assembly
(step)

2 Screw
(M1.7 × 2.5),
lock ace, p2

1 Tapping screw
(M1.7 × 4), p2
2 Screw (M1.7 × 2.5),
lock ace, p2

4 Two dowels

1 Close the cabinet (G) assembly and 5

4 Belt bracket (front) MD frame assembly in the direction
assembly, Grip belt of the arrow.

3 Two screws
(M1.7 × 2.5), lock ace, p2

qg Cabinet (G) assembly

6 HP jack retainer
7 Remove the
two solderings
1

8 Lithium battery
0 Headphone jack

9 Remove the four solderings

qa Remove the eight solderings

4 Two tapping screws

qs S terminal (M1.7 × 4), p2

5 Control switch block

(FK-30350)

qd Remove the
eleven solderings 2 Two tapping screws
(M1.7 × 4), p2

qf Memory stick connector

(PC5/PC5E model) 3 MS connector retainer

2-8
2-11. NS-12 BOARD, CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK (PS-30350),
CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK (FK-30350)

9 Tapping screw
(M1.7 × 4), p2

3 Screw
(M1.7 × 2),
lock ace, p2 2 Dowel
1 Screw
(M1.7 × 2.5),
lock ace, p2

0 Control switch
block (PS-30350)

PRECAUTION DURING
INSTALLATION

Position the claw of the

MD frame assembly on
4 Dowel 8 MD frame assembly
its top as shown.

7 NS-12 board (8P)

6 Screw (M1.7 × 2.5),
lock ace, p2
5 NS window assembly

5 G Frame ground plate

3 Screw (M1.7 × 2.5),

lock ace, p2

2 Two screws (M1.7 × 2.5),

lock ace, p2
1 Two screws (M1.7 × 2.5),
6 Cabinet (L) assembly lock ace, p2

4 Control switch block

(FK-30350)

2-9
 [SERVICE POSITION (Mainly for voltage measurement and check)]
CPC-6 terminal board jig
Lens device (LSV-651B)
(J-6082-371-A)

CPC-6 flexible jig

(J-6082-370-B)
NS-12 board (8P)

Cabinet (R) Harness CF-75 board (88P)

block assembly (PD-109) (14P)
Harness Control switch block
(PR-062) (8P) (2P) (FK-30350) (39P)

Adjustment remote
commander (RM-95)
Control switch block
(PS-30350)
VC oa
B
-2 rd
45

Mechanism deck

BJ-1 board (60P) Flexible board

(from capstan motor) (27P)
AC POWER FP-102 flexible board (27P)
ADAPTOR Flexible board
(4.2Vdc) (from video head) (10P)
(AC-VF10)
(AC-VQ11) AC IN Flexible board
(from drum motor) (10P)
VC-245 board Control switch block
(FK-30350) (39P)

VC
-2
Bo 45
ard

2-10
2-12.LCD HINGE ASSEMBLY

4 Two screws (M1.7 × 2.5), lock ace, p2

When fastening 4, fasten it while pushing
the 5 in the direction of the arrow A.
1 Two screws (M1.7 × 2.5), lock ace, p2
5 Blind plate assembly, When fastening 1, fasten it while pushing
PO-5 board the qs in the direction of the arrow B.
8 Hinge cover (rear) Hinge cover (front)
6 Screw (M1.7 × 2.5),
qs LCD hinge lock ace, p2
assembly
A
2 3 MF spacer

B
Two claws Hinge cover (rear)
7 Remove the hinge cover (rear)
9 Claw in the direction of the arrow.
qa Sheet (S)
0 Hinge Harness
cover (front) (PD-109) (14P) PRECAUTION DURING
Harness INSTALLATION
(PR-062) (8P) (2P) 6
-12
PD oard
Align sheet (S) B
with top edge of
LCD cabinet (T)
assembly
Wrap the harness with
sheet (S) for protection.

REMOVING THE HARNESS

(PD-109) (14P)
1 Remove the harness
(PD-109)(14P) in the direction REMOVING THE HARNESS
REMOVING of the arrow.
THE PO-5 BOARD (PR-062) (8P) (2P)
Two claws 2 Route the harness (PR-062) (8P) (2P)
through the hole of the LCD hinge
assembly

5 Remove PO-5 board Then bend the harness so that it is

in the direction of the arrow. laid along with the connector.
6 Blind plate assembly

Then bend the harness so that it is laid

along with the connector.

REMOVING
3 Remove the THE PR-35 BOARD
two solderings

Harness (Two cores)

(PR-062) (8P) (2P)
(8P) 7 Remove PR-35 board in the
(14P) direction of the arrow.
4 Remove the
two solderings
8 LCD hinge assembly
(2P)
Harness
(8P) (PD-109) (14P)
(14P)

2-11
2-13.ATTACHING HARNESSES OF THE LCD HINGE ASSEMBLY

1 2 Harness Harness
PR-35 board LCD hinge assembly (PR-062) (8P) (2P) (PD-109) (14P)
Blind plate assembly

PO-5 board Hinge cover (rear) (8P) (14P)

Hinge cover (front)

Screw (M1.7 × 2.5),

Harness lock ace, p2
(PD-109) (14P)
Harness Bend one of the two
(PR-062) (8P) (2P) harnesses at its connector.

3 4
A PO-5 board PR-35 board
B C
D Solder at the
two positions.
5 A KEY-A03 Solder at the
two positions.
6 B Gnd
7 C KEY-A02
D
8 D Gnd C
B
CN006
Harness A
(PR-062) (8P) (2P)

5 Install the PO-5 board in 6 Route the harnesses (PR-062) (8P) (2P)
LCD hinge assembly and (PD-109) (14P) through the hole of the
the direction of the arrow.
LCD hinge assembly as shown.

Two claws

Attach the PR-35 board to the

LCD hinge assembly LCD hinge assembly with the
both-sided adhesive tape. LCD hinge assembly
Blind plate assembly

7 5 Screw (M1.7 × 2.5), 8 3 Two screws (M1.7 × 2.5),

lock ace, p2 lock ace, p2
4 Hinge Hinge cover (rear) 1 Close Blind plate in the
cover (rear) direction of the arrow.
Harness (PR-062) (8P) (2P),
Harness (PD-109) (14P)
Blind plate
assembly

2 Two claws
Hinge cover (front)
Claw
LCD hinge
1 Hinge cover (front) 3 Close hinge cover (rear) assembly
in the direction of the arrow.
2 When attaching the blind plate assembly, route the
harnesses through the notch as shown while taking
care so that the harness must not be caught or pinched.

2-12
2-14.CIRCUIT BOARDS LOCATION
The circuit boards contained in the zoom lens are not shown.

CF-75
(CCD IMAGER)

PD-126
(LCD DRIVER)
PO-5
(PANEL OPEN)
PR-34
(PANEL REVERSE)

INVERTER
TRANSFORMER UNIT

NS-12
(REMOTE COMMANDER RECEIVER)

VC-245
A/D CONVERTER, LENS DRIVER,
CAMERA SIGNAL PROCESSING,
DV SIGNAL PROCESSING,
DV INTERFACE, REC/PB AMP,
PS CONTROL, JPEG, MS INTERFACE,
LINE IN/OUT, EVF/RGB,
DRUM CAPSTAN MOTOR DRIVE,
MECHA CONTROL, HI CONTROL,
AUDIO IN/OUT, DC/DC CONVERTER

BJ-1
(JACK, BATTERY)

2-13
2-15.FLEXIBLE BOARDS LOCATION
The flexible boards contained in the mechanism deck and that in the zoom lens are not shown.

CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK

(FK-30350) (PC5/PC5E) (PS-30350)

TOUCH PANEL (TP-30350)

CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK

(FK-30350) (PC4E)

2-14E
 DCR-PC4E/PC5/PC5E
SECTION 3
BLOCK DIAGRAMS

3-1. OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM (1/3)(DCR-PC4E) ( ) : Page No. shown in ( ) indicates the page to refer on the schematic diagram.
CF-75 BOARD(1/2) VC-245 BOARD(1/3)
LENS ASSY J3102
DV IN/OUT

IRIS (4-13) (4-17) 138

(SHUTTER) X301
139 24.576MHz CN003 CN3103
(4-27)
(4-23)
IC3201 IC701 142 45 6 TPA+,-
TPB+,-
3 3

8
CN3354
85 85
CN001
CCD OUT
30
2

| AD0-AD9
131
| IC751 68
199

203
201
205 145
L BUS
42
IC361 9
CCD (GCAM3) Y0-Y7 Y0-Y7 6 6
IMAGER 121 |
S/H,AGC 11
61
207 211 (4-37) (LIP)
A/D CONV. (BIRDS+)
CAMERA 213 215 DV INTERFACE
6 AD SO
1-4 • 10-13
47 AD SCK PROCESS,
FOCUS/ZOOM
59
C0-C3 C0-C3
1 3 IC301 51
TRCK

LCK
47
29
MC BUS
CONTROL, | 141 79
48 5 7 (CAIN) 37
EVR 56
19 23 16
70 17 DV SIGNAL
CLP OB HD,VD,OE HD,VD OE PROCESS
112 71 21 152
CLPDM,PBLK
XSHP,XSHD 72 FRRV,TRRV,TRRT
V DRAIN MSUB 23 153
81 81 115
156
AD CLK DATA TO SFD
133
DATA FROM SFD
18
IC702 1 132

127
SFD BCK
21 2 30
V1-V4,VSHT 69 69 SPCK
H1,H2,RG 22 TIMING 15 42
72 72 GENERATOR
REC CK
25 16 99
REC DT
78 78 CL 97
33 12 46

44 HD,VD 110 83 AD DT

45 111 6 6
4 88 TO
X701 35
OVERALL
36MHz
5 37 AFCK(IC903) 196 BLOCK DIAGRAM
PB CK (2/3)
81 CN003 CN3103
SPCK(IC751) 48
(4-17) 38
79
ATF ERR L
23 23 J3101
(SEE PAGE R
CN3351 CN3354 CN001 3-5) 24 24 MIC
8
IRIS
METER
M 26 DRIVE +,- 36 36
IC202 IRIS PWM
20
HD
184
170

27 35 35
IC203 I HALL AD IC302 •
19
VD
•
183 179
MC BUS

20 20
L J3103
FRRV,TRRV,TRRT
52 V AUDIO/VIDEO OUT
IRIS DRIVE (4-21) 15 15
50 R
CHARACTER 18 COL0 195 159 19 19
H 23 HALL +,- 42 42
IRIS HALL AMP IC801 4
GENERATOR •
17
•
| •
COL3 194
•
VSP SO,SI,SCK
25 40 40
3 16 191 161
(4-19) EEPROM • •
14 190
2 (4-28)
(4-19)
1 3 75
PANEL G BJ-1 BOARD
19 73
PANEL R
(2/3)
17 IC201 13
15
SHUTTER ON
133
OSD CS
OSD SO 71
PANEL B

OSD SCK
7 105 HD,VD
SHUTTER •
FOCUS 5 DRIVE 106
RESET 9 46 46 EVF G
SENSOR 67
EVF R (4-65)
65
FC A,B 139 EVF B
11 FC XA,XB 50 50 2 4 9 ENO,DIR OA,DIR OB 63 (4-25)
FOCUS
MOTOR M 14 47 47 21 23
FOCUS MOTOR
DRIVE 12
140 10 • 11 CN002
141 Y Y Y C Y

4
ZM A,B
ZM XA,XB
142
55

59
C
46
7
IC1301 18
14
C
35
C
J4001

57 57 5 7 13 ENI,DIR 1A,DIR 1B 31 S VIDEO

M 1 60 60 17 19
ZOOM MOTOR
DRIVE 16
143
(TAKO) 22
V G G

144
LINE OUT
IC204 AGC
ACC

ZOOM (4-47)
MOTOR (4-20) FC RST
137
36 IC1001
ZOOM ZM RST L
RESET 20 53 53 138 34 54
SENSOR (XYZ)
15 R
VSP SO,SCK AUDIO 55
5 56 56 14 I/O

NIGHT SHOT
(4-48)
IRIS PWM
14 43 L
(4-21) DATA FROM SFD 15 19 L R

DATA TO SFD
9
IC1002 16
R
17
64
R
14
L
J4002

MANUAL
FOCUS
17 31 31 MF A,B 22
IC802 66
I HALL AD SFD BCK
8
12
2 13 HEADPHONE

SENSOR 15 32 32 23 (ADC&DAC) L
3 25
CAMERA CONTROL D/A CONV. R
33 A/D CONV. 2 23
40 8 SP+,- 1 1
X801
20MHz 34 CAM SO,SI,SCK SPEAKER
41 10 2 2
35

(4-15) 53 AD SO,AD SCK MIC L 39 4 4 MIC

L
54 MIC R 35 6
6 MIC
R
SE3451 IC3451 YAW AD
62
ZOOM AD
EXT MIC L 42 CN4003

YAW SENSOR 12 18 27 27 58 EXT MIC R 32

48
SE3450 YAW/PITCH
SENSOR
AMP PITCH AD |
PITCH SENSOR 8 2 28 28 59
50

CONTROL
SWITCH
BLOCK
HI SO,SI,SCK
TO
OVERALL
(FK-30350)
BLOCK DIAGRAM
(3/3)
(1/2)
ZOOM AD
(SEE PAGE OSD CS,SO,SCK (SEE PAGE 4-65)
3-8) PANEL R,G,B,EVF R,G,B,HD,VD
LANC SIG

J3102
LANC SIG/232C RD
LANC/ 12 12
DIGITAL I/O
LANC GND/232C TD
11 11

CN3103 CN003

BJ-1 BOARD(1/3)
16

3-1 3-2
DCR-PC4E/PC5/PC5E

3-2. OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM (1/3)(DCR-PC5/PC5E) ( ) : Page No. shown in ( ) indicates the page to refer on the schematic diagram.
CF-75 BOARD(1/2) VC-245 BOARD(1/3)
LENS-EVF BLOCK J3102
DV IN/OUT

IRIS (4-13) (4-17) 138

(SHUTTER) X301
139 24.576MHz CN003 CN3103
(4-27)
(4-23) (4-34)
IC3201 CN3354 CN001 IC701 2 131 199 201
142 45
IC361
6 TPA+,-
TPB+,-
3 3

CCD
8 85 85
CCD OUT
30
(GCAM3)
| AD0-AD9 | IC751 68
Y0-Y7 Y0-Y7
24 IC1406 41
Y0-Y7
203 205 145
L BUS
42 9
6 6
IMAGER 121 | | |
S/H,AGC 11
61 17 34
207 211 (4-37) (LIP)
A/D CONV. (BIRDS+) (SHIORI)
CAMERA 213 215 DV INTERFACE
6 AD SO DIGITAL
1-4 • 10-13
47 AD SCK PROCESS,
FOCUS/ZOOM
59
C0-C3 C0-C7
9 STILL
PROCESS
32
C0-C3
1 3 IC301 51
TRCK

LCK
47
29
MC BUS
CONTROL, | | | 141 79
48 5 7 (CAIN) 37
EVR 56 2 29
19 23 16
70 14 28 17 DV SIGNAL
HD,VD,OE PROCESS
CLP OB HD,VD OE
112 71 13 27 21 152
CLPDM,PBLK
XSHP,XSHD 72 12 26 FRRV,TRRV,TRRT
V DRAIN MSUB 23 153
81 81 115
200 202 156
AD CLK 58 DATA TO SFD
204 206 133
| Y0-Y7 DATA FROM SFD
18
IC702 1
51
208
214
212 132
127
SFD BCK
21 2 30 216
V1-V4,VSHT 69 69 10
H1,H2,RG TIMING SPCK 49
22 15 42 2 4
72 72 GENERATOR C0-C3
| REC CK
25 16 6 8 99
46 REC DT
78 78 CL 97
33 12 46 45 18
HD,VD,OE
44 22
44 HD,VD 110 83 AD DT
43 24
45 111 6 6
4 88 TO
X701 35
OVERALL
36MHz
5 37 AFCK(IC903) 196 BLOCK DIAGRAM
PB CK (2/3)
81 CN003 CN3103
(4-17) 38 SPCK(IC751) 48 ATF ERR L
79 23 23 J3101
(SEE PAGE R
CN3351 CN3354 CN001 3-5) 24 24 MIC
8
IRIS
METER
M 26 DRIVE +,- 36 36
IC202 IRIS PWM
20
HD
184
170
J3103
27 35 35
IC203 I HALL AD IC302 •
19
VD
•
183 179
MC BUS

FRRV,TRRV,TRRT 20 20
L AUDIO/VIDEO IN/OUT EXCEPT: AEP,UK
52 V
IRIS DRIVE (4-21) 15 15 AUDIO/VIDEO OUT AEP,UK
50 R
CHARACTER 18 COL0 195 159 19 19
H 23
25
HALL +,- 42 42
IRIS HALL AMP IC801 4
GENERATOR •
17
•
| •
COL3 194
•
VSP SO,SI,SCK
40 40
3 16 191 161
(4-19) EEPROM • •
14 190
2 (4-28)
(4-19)
1 3 75
PANEL G BJ-1 BOARD
19 73
PANEL R
(2/3)
17 IC201 13

15
SHUTTER ON
133
OSD CS
OSD SO 71
PANEL B

OSD SCK
7 105 HD,VD
SHUTTER •
FOCUS 5 DRIVE 106
RESET 9 46 46 EVF G
SENSOR 67
EVF R (4-65)
65
FC A,B 139 EVF B
11 FC XA,XB 50 50 2 4 9 ENO,DIR OA,DIR OB 15 AFCK 63 (4-25)
FOCUS
MOTOR M 14 47 47 21 23
FOCUS MOTOR
DRIVE 12
140 (IC1903) 10 • 11 CN002
141 Y Y Y C Y
ZM A,B
ZM XA,XB 57 57 5 7
142 115
55

59
C
46
7
IC1301 18
14
C
35
C
J4001

4 13 ENI,DIR 1A,DIR 1B 31 S VIDEO

M 1 60 60 17 19
ZOOM MOTOR
DRIVE 16
143
(TAKO) 22
V G G

144
LINE OUT
IC204 113
112
VSP SO,SCK
LINE IN
AGC
ACC
ZOOM (4-47)
MOTOR (4-20) FC RST
137 39
SPCK
31
• 2
Y
36 48 IC1001
ZOOM
RESET 20 53 53
ZM RST
138
96 80 72 60 (IC751) 68 IC903 6
C
34 42 54
L

SENSOR (XYZ)
74 85 103 94 AFCK 34
15 R
VSP SO,SCK AUDIO 55
5 56 56 14 I/O
59 A/D CONV.
NIGHT SHOT A0-A11 D1-D10 L
Y0-Y7 | (4-48) 51
IRIS PWM R
14 43 52 L 53
(4-21) DATA FROM SFD 15 19 L R
18 31 1 13 • 38 48 49
DATA TO SFD
9
IC1002 16
R
17
64
R
14
L
J4002

MANUAL
FOCUS
17 31 31 MF A,B 22
IC802 I HALL AD
C0-C7 |
SFD BCK
8 2 13 HEADPHONE
SENSOR 15 32 32 23 66
IC752 47 12 (ADC&DAC)
D/A CONV.
3
L
25
CAMERA CONTROL 38 R
33 HD,VD,OE A/D CONV. 2 23
40 16Mbit 37 8 SP+,- 1 1
X801 SDRAM
20MHz 34 CAM SO,SI,SCK SPEAKER
41 36 10 2 2
35 (4-35)
(4-24)
63-66
(4-15) 53 AD SO,AD SCK MIC L 39 4 4 MIC
EXCEPT L
54 AEP/UK MODEL MIC R 35 6
6 MIC
R
SE3451 IC3451 62
ZOOM AD
KASYA ON
4
EXT MIC L 42 CN4003
YAW AD
YAW SENSOR 12 18 27 27 58 EXT MIC R 32
YAW/PITCH 48
SE3450 HI SO,SI SCK
SENSOR PITCH AD |
8 AMP 2 28 28 59
PITCH SENSOR
50

(4-33) (4-33)
171 • 172 • 178

IC1405 IC1407 (4-32)

TO
OVERALL
HI SO,SI,SCK
16Mbit
SDRAM
4Mbit
FLASH
IC1404
BLOCK DIAGRAM 160
(3/3) X1401
ZOOM AD 2 12 1 8 (KATHMANDU) 25.8048MHz
19 32 29 45 161
(SEE PAGE OSD CS,SO,SCK 39 49 16 25 DIGITAL
STILL
3-8) PANEL R,G,B,EVF R,G,B,HD,VD CONTROL

LANC SIG 57 CN4001

A1-A19 | 194 20 9
79 193 MS DIO,MS SCLK,MS BS 21 7 MEMORY
STICK
192 23 3
53

D0-D15 | CONTROL
35 SWITCH
(4-31) BLOCK
RXD
232C ON
TXD 181 (FK-30350)
J3102
Q1111 IC1403 175 (1/2)
LANC SIG/232C RD RXD
LANC/ 16 15
DIGITAL I/O
12 12 (SEE PAGE 4-65)
LANC GND/232C TD TXD
17 RS232C 13
11 11
I/F
CN3103 CN003

BJ-1 BOARD(1/3)
16

3-3 3-4
 DCR-PC4E/PC5/PC5E

3-3. OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM (2/3) ( ) : Page No. shown in ( ) indicates the page to refer on the schematic diagram.
CN004
FOR ADJUSTMENTS J MECHA DECK (4-42)
17 20

SWP RF MON (4-30)

VC-245 BOARD(2/3)
REC CK REC CK
40
IC102 CN101
REC DT REC DT
42 (TRW) 6 ODD 5
(4-29)
7 6
REC/PB DRUM
AMP
PB Y OUT 2 EVEN 3
42 27
AD DT 1 2
AD DT
6 6
15
IC101
20
(TRF)
EQ
TO A/D CONV.
PB CK PB CK
OVERALL 13 PLL
BLOCK DIAGRAM
(1/3)
34 22 24 31
(SEE PAGE
3-2,3-4) ATF ERR
95 SWP

60 SWP
78
| DRP SO,XDRP SCK

(4-43) 80 M902
MC BUS
FRRV TRRT,TRRV CN009
IC501 115
CAP FG 32 CAPSTAN
FG AMP
14,15
25
CAPSTAN
FG
VSP SO,SI,SCK 45 CAP ON,CAP FWD
MECHA
CONTROL 46 2,3 17

(4-44) 26 22
FFREW UP IC402 |
20
(4-41) (SALVIA)
IC502
|
(4-49) Q1638-1641
CAPSTAN
MOTOR
21,23,19 1
|
M CAPSTAN
MOTOR
37 DRIVE
Q1614 4
EEPROM FRRV
TRRT
TRRV
106
69
CAP PWM 56 IC401 54
CAP ERROR
SWITCHING
CAP VS
(4-42) 11
2-4 |
(RABI) (2/2) 18
IC1601 61 18.22 |
14
108
LPF (2/2)
74 PWM CN010 M901
|
DRIVE Q1609 IC401 1 DRUM
76 68
DRUM PWM 53 52 DRUM ERROR
SWITCHING
DRUM VS
(RABI) (1/2)
20,21,24
| M MOTOR
22 58 11
6
LPF DRUM
MOTOR
1 DRIVE
UNREG 2
(4-41)
2 9 DRUM FG
X501
20MHz 47
DRUM ON,DRUM FWD,DRUM START 16,6,3
83 48 10 DRUM PG

HI SO,SI,SCK 82 63
TO
OVERALL 81
BLOCK DIAGRAM DRUM FG 1 DRUM FG AMP 64
(3/3) 116
(SEE PAGE
3-8) CHIME SDA,CHIME SCK,CHIME VDD
XCC DOWN DRUM PG 59 61
117 DRUM PG AMP CN008

27 M903
26,25 LOADING
49
50
LOAD,UNLOAD LOADING MOTOR
DRIVE
28,30 |
24
M MOTOR

TREEL FG 40 42,43
114
SREEL FG 48 REEL FG AMP 45,46 DEW
113 23
SENSOR

TAPE END 34 35
54 TAPE END DETECT 8 T REEL
7 SENSOR

TAPE TOP 37 36
53 TAPE TOP DETECT 4 S REEL
5 SENSOR

DEW DET Q902

96
TAPE END SENSOR
3

TAPE LED ON
55
Q901
TAPE TOP SENSOR
REC PROOF SW 1
44

39 D901
MODE SW A - MODE SW C TAPE LED
|
41
16

REC PROOF

13 S901
10
4PIN
| CN901
CONNECTOR
12
XCC DOWN
17 S903
C IN
21
MODE
| SWITCH
19
S902

16

3-5 3-6
DCR-PC4E/PC5/PC5E

3-4. OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM (3/3) ( ) : Page No. shown in ( ) indicates the page to refer on the schematic diagram.
CN006 CN2103
VC-245 BOARD(3/3) 1
TP R,TP L,TP BOT,TP TOP
1 2
TOUCH
PANEL
(4-46) 4 5 6
CN2105
CN2101 FOR
IC1104 VG
ADJUSTMENTS

CN002
HI CONTROL KEY AD7 100
Q002-004
I/F
PO-5 BOARD PD-126 BOARD COM
1
2
S004
KEY AD4
(4-53) S3501 PSIG
PHOTO FREEZE SW 36 19 XPHOTO FREEZE 97 4
HSY
KEY AD3 96 5 PANEL 5
OPEN
KEY AD2 95 (4-73)
S4003,4005,4007,4008

FOCUS SW
PHOTO REC SW
SURER NIGHT SHOT SW
37 93 KEY AD0 CHIME SDA 5
PR-34 BOARD 48
IC2101 20 4
CHIME SCL 6 VR,VG,VB
(4-53) S3601 47 22 5
CHIME AD0 71
46 24 LCD
PANEL RGB 3 UNIT
CHIME SDA 7 DRIVE
CHIME AD2 73 CHIME SCK REVERSE COM
S4010,4011 CHIME VDD 40 12 23
PSIG
XCC DOWN TO 39 27 6
DISPLAY SW 33 94 KEY AD1 XCC DOWN 18
BACK LIGHT SW OVERALL
BLOCK DIAGRAM(2/3)
3 3 2
HI SO,SI,SCK PANEL R,G,B 7
(SEE PAGE 2 2 8
3-5) (4-73) 12
1 1
S4006
16
HI SO 33
HI SO,SCK
8 8
46
IC2103 12
13
19
HI SI 34 45
RESET 10 10
XHI SCK 35 42 24 22
TIMING
RESET 5 38 XRESET
(4-45) HD
GENERATOR
CN2104
13 13 1
VD
BATT LI 3V 42 12 2 48
BT4001
LITHIUM
17 3
IC1102 6
51
VDD
LANC IN 1 10 IC1103 11
LANC SIG CN005 CN2100 2 4 9
HD OUT PWM
BATTERY 7 77 LANC OUT 2 12 INVERTER
VDD SWITCH LANC I/O BL ON BLOCK
87 ND901
40 BACK
(4-45) X1101 PANEL 4.6V BACK
LIGHT
20MHz LIGHT
CONTROL SWITCH CONTROL SWITCH 41 Q1104 Q2181,2182 P UNREG DRIVE

BLOCK(PS-30350) BLOCK(FK-30350) X1102

32.768KHz
52 IB SI 48
I/F
BATT SIG

CN4004
(2/2) 53 IB SO 49

3 27 1 XCAM STBY SW
POWER SW 4 28 3 XVTR MODE SW
VTR DD ON 29
(4-39) CN001 CN3354
CF-75 BOARD LCD
2 26 5 XPHOTO STBY SW 48 20 3 3 14
UNIT
CAM DD ON 28 EVF R,G,B
47 IC1802 22 2 2
R,G,B
15
START/STOP SW 6 30 16 XS/S SW 46 24 4 4 13
Q1102,1105, RGB COM
1115-1119 DRIVE 12 1 1 16
40
EJECT SW 5 29 17 XEJECT SW SIRCS CARRIER 36 35 12
39
SIRCS ENV 59 LED
DRIVE 3
RV4001 IR ON 43
CN2202
ZOOM VR 34
SIRCS SIG 4 (4-39)
46 24 5 5

KEY AD1R XCS OSD 44

HI SO,SCK 45
IC1803 14 14 14
38 42
OSD SO 45 Q2203-2205
HD TIMING LED1
XOSD SCK 46 1 GENERATOR LED DA 5 LED2
LCD
(SEE PAGE 4-65) VD
48
22 22 DRIVE
2
BACK
2 8 LIGHT
LED ON/OFF
21 21

VCC1
CN003 17 17 6 VCC2
BATT SIG LCD 4.6V
27 27 19 19 1
Q2202,2207
29 29 CN2201
PS3101
31 31
UNREG
33 33
BATTERY
TERMINAL S 35 35 EVF VG
4 CN004
37 37 EVF VCO FOR
PS3102 5 ADJUSTMENTS
39 39
VTR DD ON
41 41
CAM DD ON
43 43

PS3103
45 45
IC1601 D 3.1V
HI UNREG
KEY AD1R
47 47 21 21
49 49 IC1602 D 1.9V PANEL R,G,B S2201
EVF R,G,B (EVF ON/OFF)
51 51
IC1603 D 1.5V
A 2.8V
HD,VD
53 53 OSD,CS,SO,SCK
PS3104
55 55 DC/DC
CONVERTER
AU 2.8V
TO
OVERALL
BLOCK DIAGRAM(1/3)
NS-12 BOARD
57 57 D 2.8V HI,SO,SI,SCK
CAM -6.5V (SEE PAGE (4-14)
59 59
CAM 12V
ZOOM AD 3-1,3-3)
CN3103 (4-39)
MT 4.8V
LANC SIG
IC001
PANEL 15.5V SIRCS SIG
68 68 6 1 REMOTE
LCD 13.5V COMMANDER
RECEIVER
LCD 4.6V

BJ-1 LCD 2.8V

RP 4.6V
BOARD A 4.6V
(3/3) NS LED K
63 63 2 D005,006
16 (NIGHT SHOT)
CN001 CN3354 CN3353

3-7 3-8
 DCR-PC4E/PC5/PC5E

3-5. POWER BLOCK DIAGRAM (1/2) ( ) : Page No. shown in ( ) indicates the page to refer on the schematic diagram.

BJ-1 BOARD VC-245 BOARD(1/2)

(4-69,70)
J3102 CN003
LANC DC LANC DC
10 10
LANC/
DIGITAL I/O BATT SIG

VTR DD ON

CAM DD ON
BATTERY
TERMINAL
PS3101
29 31 29 31 UNREG UNREG UNREG

33 35 33 35
PS3102 MT 4.8V
37 39 37 39 UNREG2
S 41 43 41 43
PS3103
45 47 45 47 UNREG3
49 51 49 51 D1613
PS3104 L1626 L1627 RECT L1628
53 55 53 55 UNREG4 HI UNREG HI UNREG

57 59 57 59

CN3103
27 27 (4-51) IC1605
CN3104 Q1623
SWITCHING
1
5 1
DC/DC CONV.
(STEP UP)
LCD 4.6V
2
Q1602,
1603 IC1601 (4-49) Q1611 LCD 13.5VV

PD-126 EMERGENCY
D1609
DC/DC CONVERTER
SWITCHING L1611 L1615 Q1604,1605
D1611

BOARD IC2101 T1601 DETECT L1601 L1602 RECT

MT 4.8V

RGB Q1617
DRIVE 5
D1606
55
2
VCC(0)1234 OUT7-1 64

1
SWITCHING (4-51) IC1602
(4-73) RECT
VCC(0)5678 OUT7-2
Q1606
-IN7 13 SWITCHING
6 28 VCC
5 1 D 1.9V
D1607 DC/DC CONV.
PANEL 2.8V LCD RECT (STEP UP)
5 UNIT Q1610
Q2102,
2104 7 SWITCHING 2 A 2.8V
L1610 L1620
PANEL 13.5V L2103 46 VSS(0)1234
6 18 AU 2.8V
PANEL 4.6V 8 57 VSS(0)567
7 OUT2-1 50 Q1620
D1608
POFF CN2104 Q1616 D 2.8V
14 14 RECT
SWITCHING EMERGENCY
OUT2-2 51
CN2100 49 VDD(0)123 DETECT

IC2103 4 2 60 VDD(0)567
43 D 1.5V
TO
POWER
D1605 -IN2 D 1.5V
BLOCK
TIMING 1 3 RECT D 1.9V DIAGRAM
GENERATOR (2/2)
Q1612
SWITCHING L1612 L1625
4 D 2.8V
(4-73) 8 +IN8
BLON L1624 A 2.8V (SEE PAGE
INVERTER
7 -IN8
L1623
3-11)
AU 2.8V
BLOCK
OUT3-1 53
Q2181,2182 BACK Q1618
UNREG LIGHT 3 OUT8 OUT3-2 54 SWITCHING
7 DRIVE Q1601
CN2101 SWITCHING Q1626,1627, D 3.1V
-IN3 40 Q1621 1629,1637
LCD 13.5V
13.5V REG
EMERGENCY A 4.6V
Q1607 T1602 DETECT
D1612(1/2)
LCD 2.8V SWITCHING
5 RECT PANEL 15.5V RP 4.6V
LCD 13.5V 4 5
6 Q1622,1624,
LCD 4.6V 1625,1628
7 VREF 27 VREF OUT4 56 1 6 CAM 12V
PANEL 15.5V 12V REG
14 -IN4 37
8
CN005
2 D1612(2/2)
Q1630-1632
RECT
CAM -6.5V
3 -6.5V REG
33 VB COMP 11

Q2203-2206
34 RT Q1613
BATT SIG SWITCHING L1613
LED L1622 A 4.6V
DRIVE 35 CT
L1621 LCD 4.6V
L1619 RP 4.6V
BACK Q1619
Q2202, CN001
LIGHT OUT1-1 47 SWITCHING L1605
2207
1 17 17 LCD 4.6V
OUT1-2 48 L1618 D 3.1V
6 19 19 LCD 13.5V 3.1V REG
VTR DD ON
CN2201 LCD 2.8V 29 CTL1-6,8 Q1633-1636 PC5/PC5E
-IN1 44
30 CTL7 Q1608
SWITCHING L1608
L1804 CAP VS 2 LCD 2.8V
LCD 2.8V REG 3
UNIT EVF VCC 5
1 16 16 CAM 12V
Q1614
OUT6-1 61 CAM -6.5V
CN2202 SWITCHING
OUT6-2 62 IC1603 (4-51)
CAP VS
IC1802 IC1803 18
CAP ERROR
+IN6 CAP VS
Q1609 Q1638-1641
RGB TIMING
DRIVE GENERATOR SWITCHING L1609
DRUM VS FFREW UP (IC501 22 ) CAP ERROR
8
(4-39) (4-39) DRUM VS
LED ON/OFF Q1615
21 21 OUT5-1 58 DRUM ERROR
SWITCHING
CN3354 OUT5-2 59

CF-75 22
DRUM ERROR
+IN5
BOARD(1/3)
16

CAM DD ON

3-9 3-10
DCR-PC4E/PC5/PC5E

3-6. POWER BLOCK DIAGRAM (2/2) ( ) : Page No. shown in ( ) indicates the page to refer on the schematic diagram.

VC-245 BOARD(2/2)
PC5/PC5E

IC1104 (4-46) CN002

MS VCC 2
HI CONTROL 24 MEMORY
STICK
8

LANC DC CN4001

BATT SIG 90 BATT SENS Q1104

D4002
VTR DD ON 91 ACV SENS IB SO 49 BATT SIG D 2.8V

CAM DD ON
(4-45) IC1102 (4-45) IB SI 48
I/F 18 ACCESS LED

D 2.8V
RV4001 CONTROL SWITCH
IC1101 RESET 5 38 XRESET VTR DD ON 29
35 ZOOM VR BLOCK(FK-30350)
UNREG
2 REG 3 3 31 42 51 CAM DD ON 28
(4-65,66)
6 VDD
D1104 63 87

MT 4.8V BATTER IN
7 4 61
REG
DETECT
BATT IN CN4004 VCR
CONTROL
IC1103 (4-45) 8
XVTR MODE SW 14 28 4
OFF SWITCH
XCAM+STBY SW 15 27 3 S1
LANC I/O
20
BLOCK
XPHOTO STBY SW 26 2 CAMERA POWER
HI UNREG
1 UNREG POWER 4 12
(PS-30350)
XLANC ON
Q1106 MEMORY PC5/PC5E (4-65)
14 LANC DC VCC 8
31 7 POWER LED
D 2.8V CHIME PWR CONT 7
92 VTR DD SENS

LCD 4.6V LCD 4.6V

S4006
16 RESET

17
BT4001
BTT LI 3V LITHIUM BATTERY
HI UNREG
Q1012,
1013

4.6V

LCD 13.5V

(4-47) (4-48) (4-47)

5

IC1001 IC1002 3 IC1003 2

(XYZ) AUDIO
AUDIO I/O ADC&DAC
4.6V REG

IC502 IC501 XREEL

HALL ON

D 1.9V EEPROM MECHA

105 CF-75 BOARD(2/3)
22 FFREW UP
CONTROL CN001 CN3354 D005,006

A 2.8V A 2.8V (4-44) (4-43) 64 64 MT 4.8V

1 NIGHT SHOT
66 66 LED

AU 2.8V AU 2.8V (4-14)

FB501
TO
POWER BLOCK
DIAGRAM
D 2.8V D 2.8V
17 17 LCD 4.6V IC001
5
(1/2) 19 19 REMOTE
D 1.5V CN3353
COMMANDER
EVER 3.0V A 2.8V RECEIVER
(SEE PAGE 26 26
3-10)
IC903 IC1301 IC301 IC361 IC302 PITCH,YAW

(4-35) (4-37) (4-25) (4-27) (4-28) IC3451 SENSOR

SE3450,3451
A/D CONV. VIDEO DV DV CHARACTER PITCH,YAW
D 3.1V
LINE IN/OUT
AMP
SIGNAL
PROCESS
INTERFACE GENERATER SENSOR AMP
(4-15) NS-12 BOARD
A 4.6V A 4.6V EXCEPT AEP/UK MODEL
D 3.1V FB753

RP 4.6V RP 4.6V PC5/PC5E PC4E

MT 4.8V
D 1.9V
D 2.8V
IC401 Q1109

A 2.8V IC402 (4-41) CHIME VDD

10 4PIN
CONNECTOR
LCD 13.5V
(4-42) DRUM
MOTOR DRIVE Q402
PC5/PC5E DRUM ERROR
DRUM FG,PG AMP
L801 52 SENSOR VCC
LOADING 9 T REEL,
CAPSTAN MOTOR CAP ERROR
54 MOTOR DRIVE S REEL
CAP_VS DRIVE, REEL FG AMP SENSOR
CAP VS 18 DRUM VS
CAP FG AMP 11 TAPE TOP,END DET
IC802 IC801 IC703 IC751 IC752 IC701

CHIME PWR CONT

DRUM,CAP ERROR AMP

XREEL HALL ON
CAP ERROR
1.5V (BIRDS+)
CAMERA (GCAM3)
DRUM VS FC RST LED CAMERA EEPROM 1.5V REG SIGNAL 16M Q801 D 2.8V
16 S/H,AGC
CONTROL PROCESS SDRAM A/D CONV. HI UNREG
DRUM ERROR
L201 ZM RST LED (4-21) (4-21) (4-17) (4-23) (4-24) (4-17) MT 4.8V R424 TAPE LED A
15 15 TAPE LED

CAM 12V MF LED

21 CN008
CAM -6.5V
J MECHA DECK
(4-17) (SEE PAGE 4-42)
A 4.6V RP 4.6V
L102
MT 4.8V
D 2.8V
L203
FB101
A 2.8V
D 1.9V
IC702
FB201
(4-20)
(4-19)
TIMING CF-75 BOARD
GENERATOR
IC202 (3/3)
IC201 IC204 IC102 IC101 (4-13)
IC203 (TRW) (TRF) CAM 12V

SHUTTER
DRIVE
FOCUS/ZOOM
MOTOR DRIVE IRIS DRIVE REC/PB EQ,
82 82
IC3201
IRIS HALL AMP AMP A/D CONV.
PLL
CAM -6.5V CCD
84 84 IMAGER LENS ASSY
(4-19) (4-30) (4-29)
PC5/PC5E MF VCC MF VCC
30 30 18 FOCUS
RING
IC1403 IC1405 IC1407 IC1406 IC1404 FC RST LED
(SHIORI) MS VCC ON Q204
DIGITAL 33
RS232C 16Mbit 4Mbit DIGITAL STILL
I/F SDRAM FLASH STILL CONTROL D 2.8V FC RESET VCC FOCUS
PROCESS 45 45 9 RESET
SENSOR
ZM RST LED
D 1.5V
(4-31) (4-33) (4-33) (4-34) (4-32) Q1406,1407 Q203

D 3.1V ZM RESET VCC ZOOM

55 55 20 RESET
SENSOR
16 CN001 CN3354 CN3351

3-11 3-12E
 I

J
F

L
E

K
C
B
A

O
N
H
G
D

16
1

STICK
OFF
VTR

EJECT
FHOTO
POWER

CAMERA

(POWER)

BLOCK(PS-30350)
START/STOP
SP901

CONTROL SWITCH

PC5/PC5E ONLY
MEMORY
(MIC L)
(MIC R)

SPEAKER

CONNECTOR
MIC901
2

9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6

11
10
BS
NC
NC

DI0
INS
SP-
SP+

VSS
VCC
VCC
VSS
GND
GND
GND

SLCK
MIC_L
MIC_R

XS/S_SW
EJECT_SW

CASE-GND
XPOWER_LED
3

XCAM+STBY_SW
XVTR_MODE_SW
POWER_LED_VCC

CN4001
XPHOTO_STBY_SW
CN4003

CN4004

11P
8P
6P

G
C
RV4001
4

(FK-30350)

(HEADPHONE)
G
S4006
S4011
S4010
S4008
S4007
S4005
S4004
S4003

W
D4002

S
(MS ACCESS)

ZOOM

T
AF/MF

LITHIUM BATTERY
RESET
INFINITY

DISPLAY
PHOTO REC

BACK LIGHT

J4001

J4002
S VIDEO
PHOTO FREEZE
+SLOW SHUTTER
CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK
5
4-1. FRAME SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM (1/2)

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39

4-1
BS

SP-
INS

DIO

SP+
VCC

GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND

HP_L
SCLK

HP_R

MIC_L
MIC_R
D_2.8V
D_2.8V
CN002

S_Y_I/O
S_C_I/O
MS_LED
KEY_AD1
KEY_AD0

XS/S_SW
6

EJECT_SW
KEY_AD1R

BATT_LI_3V

XS_JACK_IN
XRESET_SW

HP_JACK_IN
XPOWER_LED
ZOOM_SW_AD
BLOCK

PHOTO_FREEZE

XCAM+STBY_SW
39P

XVTR_MODE_SW
POWER_LED_VCC
SECTION 4

LENS-EVF

XPHOTO_STBY_SW
NS-12
BOARD

CN101 10P
7

GND 1 10 GND
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

YSDL 2 9 NC
XSDL 3 8 NC CN001 88P CN3354 88P
GND
GND

GND 4 7 GND 1 COM G 2

MT_4.8V

YODD 5 6 O(-) 3 R B 4
LCD_4.6V
NS_LED_K

SIRCS_SIG

HEAD
VIDEO
XODD 6 5 O(+) 5 BLK HCK1 6
TALLY_LED_A

XF_TALLY_LED
CN3353

GND 7 4 GND 7 HCK2 HST 8

YEVEN 8 3 E(-) 9 RGT DWN 10
8P
8

XEVEN 9 2 E(+) 11 EN STB 12

GND 10 1 GND 13 VCK VST 14
CN3351 27P
15 GND EVF_VCC 16
ZM_XA 1
CN010 10P 17 LCD_4.6V GND 18
ZM_XB 2
PG 1 10 PG 19 LCD_4.6V GND 20
ZM_A 3
FG 2 9 FG 21 LCD_ON/OFF LED_DA 22
ZM_B 4
FG/PG COM 3 8 FG/PG COM 23 XEVF_SW GND 24
NS_VCC 5

FG
M COM 4 7 C COM 25 C_RESET A_2.8V 26

PG
GND 6
9

DRUM_U 5 6 U 27 YS_OUT PS_OUT 28

FC_RESET 7
DRUM_U 6 5 U 29 GND MF_VCC 30
TEMP 8
PRINTED WIRING BOARDS AND SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS

DRUM_V 7 4 V 31 MF_A MF_B 32

M
FC_RESET_VCC 9

M901
DRUM
MOTOR
DRUM_V 8 3 V 33 GND GND 34
GND 10
DRUM_W 9 2 W 35 DRIVE- DRIVE+ 36
FC_XA 11
DRUM_W 10 1 W 37 GND GND 38
FC_XB 12
39 BIAS- HALL- 40
FC_A 13
CN008 27P 41 BIAS+ HALL+ 42
FC_B 14
10

1 LM_LOAD LM_LOAD 1 27 L 43 GND GND 44

MF_B 15
7/19 RF BLOCK
4/19 CA BLOCK
2/19 LD BLOCK
1/19 CH BLOCK

3/19 CM BLOCK

2 LM_LOAD LM_LOAD 2 26 L 45 FC_RESET_VCC FC_RESET 46

10/19 IN BLOCK
6/19 JC-2 BLOCK
5/19 JC-1 BLOCK

8/19 MS-1 BLOCK

9/19 MS-2 BLOCK

GND 16
CF-75 BOARD

3 LM_UNLOAD LM_UNLOAD 3 25 UL 47 FC_B FC_A 48

M
M903
MF_A 17

MOTOR
LOADING
4 LM_UNLOAD LM_UNLOAD 4 24 UL 49 FC_XB FC_XA 50
MF_VCC 18
5 DEW+ DEW+ 5 23 DEW(+) 51 MT_GND MT_GND 52
GND 19
6 DEW- DEW- 6 22 DEW(-) 53 ZM_RESET TEMP 54
ZM_RESET 20
7 MODE_SW_A MODE_SW_A 7 21 MODE SW A 55 ZM_RESET_VCC NS_VCC 56

FLEXIBLE
FP-100
ZM_RESET_VCC 21

S902
MODE
8 MODE_SW_B MODE_SW_B 8 20 MODE SW B 57 ZM_B ZM_A 58

SWITCH
VC-245 BOARD

BIAS+ 22
11

9 MODE_SW_C MODE_SW_C 9 19 MODE SW C 59 ZM_XB ZM_XA 60

15/19 HI BLOCK
11/19 IO BLOCK
12/19 VF BLOCK

19/19 CN BLOCK
16/19 AU BLOCK
14/19 MC BLOCK
13/19 MD BLOCK

HALL+ 23
18/19 DD-2 BLOCK
17/19 DD-1 BLOCK

10 SW_COM/SW_GND SW_COM/SW_GND 10 18 MODE SW COM 61 MT_GND MT_GND 62

BIAS- 24
XCCDOWN_SW 11 17 CIN SW 63 NS_LED_K MT4.8V 64
HALL- 25
TAPE_LED_K 12 16 LED K 65 XF_TALLY_LED MT_4.8V 66
DRIVE+ 26

Q902
S903
TAPE_LED_A 13 15 LED A 67 MT_GND SIRCS_SIG 68

TAPE TOP
DRIVE- 27

(CC DOWN)
MIC/REC_SW_GND 14 14 MIC/REC.P GND 69 VSHT H_GND 70
XREC_PROOF 15 13 REC.P SW 71 H_GND V4 72

DEW

FLEXIBLE
FP-228
SENSOR
CHIME_SCK 16 12 MIC SCK 73 RG V3 74
12

CHIME_SDA 17 11 MIC SDA 75 H1 V2 76

Q901

TAPE END
CN901 3P
CHIME_VDD 18 10 MIC DVV 77 H2 V1 78
HALL_VCC 19 9 Reel Sensor COM 79 H_GND H_GND 80
TREEL+ 20 8 Reel Sensor T(+) 81 MSUB 12V 82
TREEL- 21 7 Reel Sensor T(-) 83 CCD_GND -6.5V 84

D901
S901
HALL_GND 22 6 Reel Sensor HALL(-) 85 CCD_OUT CCD_GND 86

TAPE LED
REC PROOF
SREEL- 23 5 Reel Sensor S(-) 87 CCD_GND CCD_GND 88
SREEL+ 24 4 Reel Sensor S(+)
13

TAPE_END 25 3 END Sensor

FLEXIBLE
TOP/END_GND 26 2 T/E Sensor GND

FP-102
TAPE_TOP 27 1 TOP Sensor
CN2201
CN2202

6P

CN009 27P
16P

CAP_V 1 1 V
CAP_V 2 2 V
VCC1
LED1
LED2
LED3
LED4
VCC2
VVDD
VSS
VST
VCK2
VCK1
EN
CLR
RGT
HST
HCK2
HCK1
BLK
B
R
G
COM

CAP_V 3 3 V
6
5
4
3
2
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
14

CAP_V 4 4 V
UHE- 5 5 HU(-)
HE VCC 6 6 HE Vcc
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1

20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10

UHE+ 7 7 HU(+)
HALL
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC

VHE+ 8 8 HV(+)
TCK

GND
GND
TMS
GND

SWP

WHE+ 9 9 HW(+)
EVF_VG

JIG_TDI

RF_MON
JIG_TDO
EVF_VCO
LANC_SIG

HE_GND 10 10 HE GND
CAP_W 11 11 W
CN004
15

CAP_W 12 12 W
M
M902
RF_IN/LANC_JACK_IN

MOTOR
CAPSTAM

CAP_W 13 13 W
20P
LCD902

CAP_W 14 14 W
WHE- 15 15 HW(-)
VHE- 16 16 HV(-)
FG
BACK-LIGHT

CPC

CAP_U 17 17 U
CAP_U 18 18 U
(FOR CHECK)

CAP_U 19 19 U
16

CAP_U 20 20 U
N.C. 21 21 (BLK)
FG1 22 22 FG1
FG_VCC 23 23 MR Vcc
FG_VCC 24 24 MR Vcc
FG2 25 25 FG2
J-100 MECHANISM

FG_GND 26 26 MR GND
FG_GND 27 27 MR GND
17

4-2
4-3)
TO FH(2/2)

(SEE PAGE

FRAME SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM (1/2)

DCR-PC4E/PC5/PC5E
DCR-PC4E/PC5/PC5E

FRAME SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM (2/2)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14

BACK-LIGHT

BL-LOW

BL-GND
BL-HIGH
B CN2104 24P

TEST1/COMCNT 24

COM/SMON2 23
VST/SSP 22
PIEZO TRANS UNIT VCK/SSPB 21

EN/SCK 20

DWN/SCKB 19
CN005 14P CN2100 14P
VVDD/SVDD 18
C PANEL_B 1 1 PANEL_B
VSS/GND 17
LCD
VC-245 BOARD PANEL_G 2 2 PANEL_G
HVDD/GVCC 16 LCD901
PANEL_R 3 3 PANEL_R
VVSSG/GSP 15
GND 4 4 REG_GND
CS/GSPB 14
LCD_2.8V 5 5 PANEL_2.8V
WIDE/GCKB 13
LCD_13.5V 6 6 PANEL_13.5V
HST/GCK 12
LCD_4.6V 7 7 PANEL_4.6V
REF/GPWCB 11
XHI_SCK 8 8 XHI_SCK
SOUT/GPWC 10
D XCS_LCD 9 9 XCS_PANEL
CRext/PCTLB 9
HI_SO 10 10 HI_SO
HCK2/PCTL 8
GND 11 11 REG_GND
HCK1/GUD 7
DISP_XVD 12 12 XVD
PSIG/PVID 6
DISP_XHD 13 13 XHD
G/VG 5
PANEL_15.5V 14 14 PANEL_15.5V
R/VR 4

TO FH(1/2) B/VB 3
CN2105 5P
(SEE PAGE RGT/SLR 2
E 4-2)
1 VG
TEST2/SMON1 1
TOUTH
2 COM PANEL
CPC 3 GND

(FOR CHECK) 4 PSIG

5 HSY

CN2103 7P
CN006 8P CN2101 8P
N.C.(GND) 7
TP_R 1 1 TP_R
TP_TOP 6
F TP_L 2 2 TP_L
TP_BOT 5
TP_BOT 3 3 N.C.
N.C. 4
TP_TOP 4 4 TP_BOT

10

12

14

16
18

20

22

24

26
28
30

32
34

36
38
40

42
44

46
48
50
52

54

56
58
60
2
4

6
8
TP_L 3
KEY_AD3 5 5 TP_TOP
TP_R 2

GND

GND

LANC_DC
LANC_SIG

GND

GND

L_IO
GND

EXT_MIC_R

GND
GND
GND

GND
GND

GND
GND

GND
GND
GND

GND
GND

GND
GND
GND
GND

GND

GND
TPA+

TPA-

AV_JACK_IN
GND 6 6 N.C.
N.C. 1
KEY_AD2 7 7 UNREG

GND 8 8 GND

CN003 60P
G PD-126 BOARD

LANC_GND/232C_TD
60P

XLANC_JACK_IN
CN3103

PO-5 BOARD

EXT_MIC_L

UNREG2

UNREG2
UNREG2
UNREG2

UNREG3
UNREG3

UNREG3
UNREG3
UNREG4

UNREG4
UNREG4

UNREG4
UNREG
UNREG
UNREG

UNREG
TPB+

R_IO
TPB-

V_IO
GND

GND

GND

GND

GND

GND
H

IB
S3501
(PANEL OPEN)
11
13

15

17

19
21

23

25
27

29
31
33

35
37

39
41
43

45
47

49
51
53

55
57

59
1

3
5

PR-34 BOARD
BT001
I BATTERY
TERMINAL
S J3102
S3601
(PANEL REVERSE)
J3103 J3101
DIGITAL I/O CN3102
AUDIO/VIDEO EXT MIC
DV IN/OUT (PC5/PC5E)
(LANC)
DV OUT (PC4E) CN3104 2P

GND 2

BJ-1 BOARD UNREG 1

FRAME SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM (2/2)

4-3 4-4
 DCR-PC4E/PC5/PC5E DCR-PC4E/PC5/PC5E

4-2. PRINTED WIRING BOARDS AND SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS

THIS NOTE IS COMMON FOR WIRING BOARDS AND SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS

(In addition to this, the necessary note is printed in each block)

(For printed wiring boards) (Measuring conditions voltage and waveform)

• b: Pattern from the side which enables seeing. • Voltages and waveforms are measured between the measure-
(The other layers' patterns are not indicated.) ment points and ground when camera shoots color bar chart of
• Through hole is omitted. pattern box. They are reference values and reference wave-
• Circled numbers refer to waveforms. forms. *
• There are few cases that the part printed on diagram (VOM of DC 10 MΩ input impedance is used.).
isn’t mounted in this model. • Voltage values change depending upon input impedance of VOM
• Chip parts. used.) *
Transistor Diode
C 65 4 45 6 4 5 1 2 3 3 3 1. Connection
Pattern box
B E 12 3 32 1 32 1 54 3 2 1 2 1 2 1
(For schematic diagrams)
• All capacitors are in mF unless otherwise noted. pF : m mF. 50V
or less are not indicated except for electrolytics and tantalums.
• Chip resistors are 1/10W unless otherwise noted.
kW=1000W, MW=1000kW. 1.5 m
• Caution when replacing chip parts.
New parts must be attached after removal of chip.
Be careful not to heat the minus side of tantalum capacitor, Be-
cause it is damaged by the heat.
• Some chip part will be indicated as follows.
Example C541 L452
22U 10UH
TA A 2520 Front of the lens

Kinds of capacitor
Temperature characteristics
External dimensions (mm)
2. Adjust the distance so that the output waveform of Fig. a and
• Constants of resistors, capacitors, ICs and etc with XX indicate the Fig. b can be obtain.
that they are not used.
In such cases, the unused circuits may be indicated. H
Yellow

Magenta

• All variable and adjustable resistors have characteristic curve B,

White
Cyan
Green

unless otherwise noted.

Red

• Signal name
Blue

XEDIT → EDIT PB/XREC → PB/REC

• 2 : non flammable resistor
• 1 : fusible resistor
• C : panel designation
• A : B+ Line *
• B : B– Line *
•J : IN/OUT direction of (+,–) B LINE. *
A B A=B B A
• C : adjustment for repair. * Fig. a (Video output terminal output waveform)
• Circled numbers refer to waveforms. *
* Indicated by the color red.
Electron beam
Note : Note :
scanned frame
The components identified by Les composants identifiés par
Magenta
Green
Yellow

White
Cyan

Blue

mark 0 or dotted line with mark une marque 0 sont critiques

Red

0 are critical for safety. pour la sécurité. CRT picture frame

Replace only with part number Ne les remplacer que par une
specified. pièce portant le numéro spécifié.

Fig.b (Picture on monitor TV)

When indicating parts by reference number, pleas include

the board name.

4-5
DCR-PC4E/PC5/PC5E

CF-75 (CCD IMAGER) PRINTED WIRING BOARD

— Ref. No. CF-75 Board; 20,000 Series —

For printed wiring board

• Refer to page 4-82 for parts location.
• CF-75 board consists of multiple layers. However, only
the sides (layers) A and B are shown.
• Chip parts

Transistor
C

B E

There are few cases that the part printed on this

diagram isn’t mounted in this model.

CF-75
(CCD IMAGER)

PD-126
(LCD DRIVER)
PO-5
(PANEL OPEN)
PR-34
(PANEL REVERSE)

INVERTER
TRANSFORMER UNIT

CCD IMAGER
CF-75 4-7 4-8
 DCR-PC4E/PC5/PC5E

CCD IMAGER
4-9 4-10 CF-75
DCR-PC4E/PC5/PC5E

NS-12 (REMOTE COMMANDER RECEIVER) PRINTED WIRING BOARD

— Ref. No. NS-12 Board; 20,000 Series —

For printed wiring board NS-12

• Refer to page 4-82 for parts location. (REMOTE COMMANDER RECEIVER)
• NS-12 board consists of multiple layers. However, only
the sides (layers) A and B are shown.

There are few cases that the part printed on this VC-245
diagram isn’t mounted in this model. A/D CONVERTER, LENS DRIVER,
CAMERA SIGNAL PROCESSING,
DV SIGNAL PROCESSING,
DV INTERFACE, REC/PB AMP,
PS CONTROL, JPEG, MS INTERFACE,
LINE IN/OUT, EVF/RGB,
DRUM CAPSTAN MOTOR DRIVE,
MECHA CONTROL, HI CONTROL,
AUDIO IN/OUT, DC/DC CONVERTER

BJ-1
(JACK, BATTERY)

REMOTE COMMANDER RECEIVER

NS-12 4-11 4-12
 DCR-PC4E/PC5/PC5E

For Schematic Diagram

• Refer to page 4-7 for CF-75 printed wiring board.
• Refer to page 4-77 for CF-75 board waveforms.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
CF-75 BOARD(1/2)
NO MARK:REC/PB MODE
CCD IMAGER(CD BLOCK) R :REC MODE
A -REF.NO.:10000 SERIES- P :PB MODE
NS-12 BOARD
XX MARK:NO MOUNT
REMOTE COMMANDER RECEIVER
-REF.NO.:10000 SERIES-
V4

V3

V2

V1

R3202
NO MARK:REC/PB MODE
0
R12.2/P0
R-6.4/P0

R-6.4/P0

R-0.2/P0

R-0.2/P0

R6.9/P0

1 R6.9/P0
CN3353 8P

B 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Q3202
UN9213J-(K8).SO COM
CN3354 88P
R3351
1 MT_4.8V GND 8

G 2 NS_LED_K GND 7
1 COM G 2 3300
MSUB R B 3 TALLY_LED_A SIRCS_SIG 6
V4

V3

V2

V1

V_HOLD

V_DRAIN

VDD
ICX228BCK

3 R B 4

3 IC3201 0 BLK
5 BLK HCK1 6
HCK1 4 XF_TALLY_LED LCD_4.6V 5
D003
2.8

2 CCD IMAGER
HCK2

RGT
7 HCK2 HST 8
HST 5

6
LCD_4.6V

SIRCS_SIG
XF_TALLY_LED

TALLY_LED_A
4

3
TLSU1002(TPX1,SONY)
2 1

4 7 EN
9 RGT DWN 10
DWN
7 GND NS_LED_K 2
(TALLY)

6 STB
IC3201

CAM_12V 11 EN STB 12
CCD_OUT

VCK VST 8 GND MT_4.8V 1 3 4

L3201 13 VCK VST 14
C 100uH 4.6
GND

EVF_VCC
SUB

2SC4178-F13F14-T1
RG
H2

H1
VL

2520 15 GND EVF_VCC 16

R12.2/P0 17 LCD_4.6V GND 18 GND IC001
Q3201

14 13 12 11 10 9 8
5 RS-70-TU
BUFFER

19 LCD_4.6V GND 20 COM

LED_ON/OFF
R-6.8/
P0.3
R6.8/
P0

R9.6/P0 LED_DA COM

R1.4/P0

R1.6/P0

R10.4/P0

D006 D005

C3201
XEVF_SW
21
23
LED_ON/OFF

XEVF_SW
LED_DA
GND
22
24
G

R
G DCZ2805 DCZ2805 IC001
10u R8.8/P0 C_RESET R (NIGHT SHOT) REMOTE COMMANDER
10V CCD_OUT 25 C_RESET A_2.8V 26 B RECEIVER
TA A YS_OUT B
PS_OUT
27 YS_OUT PS_OUT 28 BLK
C3207 C3202 MF_VCC BLK
2200p 10p 29 GND MF_VCC 30 HCK1
D B CH

R3201 C3206 C3203 C3204 C3205

MF_A
31 MF_A MF_B 32
MF_B
HCK2
HCK1
LENS-EVF BLOCK is replaced as a block.
HCK2
So that this PRINTED WIRING and
CAM_-6.5V

3300 XX 0.1u 22u XX 33 GND GND 34 HST

C3208 CH F 16V B DRIVE- DRIVE+ HST
0.1u
TA B 1608 35 DRIVE- DRIVE+ 36 SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM is omitted.
B
8 RGT
RGT
SUB

2012
RG
H2

H1

37 GND GND 38 DWN

BIAS- HALL- DWN 1 TO(2/2)
39 BIAS- HALL- 40 EN
BIAS+ HALL+ EN
41 BIAS+ HALL+ 42 STB
STB
43 GND GND 44 VCK
CN3351 27P FC_RESET_VCC FC_RESET VCK
ZM_XA 45 FC_RESET_VCC FC_RESET 46 VST
E ZM_XA

ZM_XB
1

2
ZM_XB
FC_B

FC_XB
47 FC_B FC_A 48
FC_A VST
FC_XA
ZM_A 49 FC_XB FC_XA 50 EVF_VCC
ZM_A 3 EVF_VCC
ZM_B 51 MT_GND GND 52
ZM_B 4 ZM_RESET TEMP
NS_VCC 5
NS_VCC
ZM_RESET_VCC
53 ZM_RESET TEMP 54
NS_VCC
LCD_4.6V
SIGNAL PATH
55 ZM_RESET_VCC NS_VCC 56
GND 6 ZM_B
57 ZM_B ZM_A 58
ZM_A LED_ON/OFF
LED_ON/OFF
VIDEO SIGNAL
FC_RESET
FC_RESET 7 ZM_XB ZM_XA LED_DA
TEMP 8
TEMP 59 ZM_XB ZM_XA 60 LED_DA CHROMA Y Y/CHROMA
XEVF_SW
FC_RESET_VCC 61 MT_GND GND 62 XEVF_SW
F FC_RESET_VCC
GND 10
9
63 NS_LED_K MT4.8V 64
REC

FC_XA 11
FC_XA 65 XF_TALLY_LED MT4.8V 66
A_2.8V
PB
FC_XB 67 MT_GND SIRCS_SIG 68
LENS-EVF FC_XB 12 SUB
BLOCK 69 VSHT H_GND 70
FC_A C_RESET
FC_A 13 V4 C_RESET
FC_B 71 H_GND V4 72
FC_B 14 RG V3 2 TO(2/2)
MF_B 73 RG V3 74 PS_OUT
MF_B 15 H1 V2 PS_OUT
75 H1 V2 76
GND 16 H2 V1 YS_OUT
MF_A 77 H2 V1 78 YS_OUT
G MF_A
MF_VCC
17
18
MF_VCC
MSUB
79 H_GND H_GND 80
CAM_12V
GND
81 MSUB CAM_12V 82
GND 19 CAM_-6.5V
ZM_RESET 83 CCD_GND CAM_-6.5V 84
ZM_RESET 20 CCD_OUT
ZM_RESET_VCC 85 CCD_OUT CCD_GND 86
ZM_RESET_VCC 21
BIAS+ 87 CCD_GND CCD_GND 88
BIAS+ 22
HALL+
Precautions Upon Replacing CCD imager
HALL+ 23
TO VC-245 BOARD CN001
BIAS- 24
BIAS-
(SEE PAGE 4-54)
• The CF-75 board mounted as a repair part is not equipped with
HALL-
H HALL- 25 a CCD imager.
DRIVE+
DRIVE+ 26
DRIVE-
When replacing this board, remove the CCD imager from the
DRIVE- 27
old one and mount it onto the new one.
16
• If the CCD imager has been replaced, carry out all the
adjustments for the camera section.
• As the CCD imager may be damaged by static electricity from
its structure, handle it carefully like for the MOS IC.
In addition, ensure that the receiver is not covered with dusts
nor exposed to strong light.

4-13
CCD IMAGER
CF-75 (1/2) / REMOTE COMMANDER RECEIVER NS-12
DCR-PC4E/PC5/PC5E

For Schematic Diagram

• Refer to page 4-7 for printed wiring board.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
CF-75 BOARD(2/2) C3464
PITCH,YAW SENSOR C3452
22u
0.33u
B
C3457 2012
A (SE BLOCK) 4V
TA P 0.047u
-REF.NO.:10000 SERIES- B

3
GND
XX MARK:NO MOUNT SE3450 R3458
C3459 C3462 15k C3465
R3452 R3453 0.047u 10u 22u C3466

4
22k B B 4V 0.1u
NO MARK:REC/PB MODE 22k
TA P B
R :REC MODE

R3456
(PITCH SENSOR) A_2.8V

R3459
C3455

10k
P :PB MODE

1M
L3451
0.1u 10uH
B

C3463
10u B
PS_OUT

0.7

0.9

1.4

1.4

1.3

1.4

1.4

1.4
C3453
22u 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
4V
TA P

GND

LIB1

LIA1

LO1

HI1

HO1

AM1

OUT1
Vref1

PASS
2 TO(1/2)
IC3451
PITCH,YAW
SENSOR AMP

IC3451
UPC6756GR-8JG-E2

R1.2/P0.6
C

C_RESET
OUT2
Vref2
LIB2

LIA2

AM2
HO2

VCC
LO2

HI2
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

0.6

0.8

1.2

1.2

1.3

1.3

1.3

2.8
C_RESET
YS_OUT
D R3455
10k R3457
1

3
C3456 1M
C3460
SE3451 0.047u 10u B
C3454 B 3216
R3451 0.1u
2

4 22k B

(YAW SENSOR) R3454 C3458 C3461

22k 0.047u 10u B
B 3216
R2202
XX
Q2203-2206
Q2202 LED DRIVER
E C2202
0.1u
NDS356AP R2206
33k
R2207
8200
CN2201 6P
4.6
LCD_4.6V 6 VCC1
R0/
C2201

2SC4738F-Y/GR(TPL3)
P4.6 5 LED1
10u

2SC4738F-Y/GR(TPL3)
6.3V R4.4/ ND902

2SC4738F-Y/GR(TPL3)
4 N.C.
P0 BACK-LIGHT

Q2203
R0/ R2210 3 N.C.
P1.9 XX
C2203

Q2205
R2201

Q2204
470k 0.047u 2 LED2
LED_DA R0/ 1 VCC2
P4.6
R2205

R0/P2.5

2SC4738F-Y/GR(TPL3)
Q2202-2207 8200
R0/
F LED ON/OFF
SWITCH
R2203
P1.3
R2204 R0/P1.9

Q2206
0 8200 R0/
P1.3

R4.4/P0 R0/
R2208 P1.3
Q2207 1500
UN9213J-(K8).SO
R0/P0.6
R0/
LED_ON/OFF P0.6
R0/P2.8
R2209 R2211 R2212 R2213
5600 2200 47 47 SIGNAL PATH
G GND
S2201
TH2201 VIDEO SIGNAL

R2214 (EVF ON/OFF) CHROMA Y Y/CHROMA

33k
1 TO(1/2) XEVF_SW CN2202 16P REC
COM 16 COM
G 15 G
PB
R2215
100k
R R2216 14 R
100k
B R2217 13 B
H BLK
100k
R2218 12 BLK Note : Note :
100k
HCK1 11 HCK1 The components identified by Les composants identifiés par
LCD902
HCK2 10 HCK2 LCD mark 0 or dotted line with mark une marque 0 sont critiques
UNIT
HST 9 HST 0 are critical for safety. pour la sécurité.
RGT 8 RGT Replace only with part number Ne les remplacer que par une
DWN 7 DWN specified. pièce portant le numéro spécifié.
EN 6 EN
STB 5 STB
I VCK 4 VCK
VST 3 VST
GND 2 VSS
16 EVF_VCC 1 VDD

PITCH, YAW SENSOR

CF-75 (2/2) 4-15 4-16
Schematic diagram and printed wiring board of the VC-245 board are not shown.
Pages from 4-17 to 4-58 are not shown.
DCR-PC4E/PC5/PC5E DCR-PC4E/PC5/PC5E

PO-5 (PANEL OPEN), PR-34 (PANEL REVERSE) PRINTED WIRING BOARDS

— Ref. No. PO-5, PR-34 Boards; 30,000 Series —

PO-5 BOARD

LND351

S3501
(PANEL OPEN)

LND352

TO
RP-34 BOARD
VC-245 BOARD
CN006 LND361

S3601
(PANEL REVERSE)

LND362

16

For printed wiring board

• PO-5 and PR-34 boards consists of multiple layers.
However, only the sides (layers) A and B are shown.

There are few cases that the part printed on this

diagram isn’t mounted in this model.

CF-75
(CCD IMAGER)

PD-126
(LCD DRIVER)
PO-5
(PANEL OPEN)
PR-34
(PANEL REVERSE)

INVERTER
TRANSFORMER UNIT

PANEL OPEN
PO-5 / PANEL REVERSE
PR-34 4-60
 DCR-PC4E/PC5/PC5E

FP-100 (MODE SWITCH), FP-228 (DEW SENSOR), FP-102 (TAPE TOP/END SENSOR, S/T REEL) FLEXIBLE BOARDS 27 1
— Ref. No. FP-100, 102, 228 Flexible Board; 7,000 Series —

Q902
TAPE TOP
SENSOR

FP-102 FLEXIBLE BOARD

10 1

1-677-085- 11

S903 D901
(CC DOWN) (TAPE LED)

S901
(REC PROOF)
CN901

Q901
TAPE END
SENSOR
H902
T REEL
SENSOR

H901
S REEL 1 10
SENSOR
FP-100 FLEXIBLE BOARD
M903
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 LOADING M
TO VC-245 BOARD CN008 MOTOR
10
11

12
13
14

15

16

17
18

19

20
21

22
23
24

25

26

27
1
2

3
4

6
7
8

9
LM_LOAD
LM_LOAD

LM_UNLOAD
LM_UNLOAD

DEW+

XMODE_SW_A

XMODE_SW_B

XMODE_SW_C

SW_COM/SW_GND

XCCDOWN_SW

MIC/REC_SW_GND

XREC_PROOF

CHIME_SCK

CHIME_SDA
CHIME_VDD

HALL_VCC
TREEL+
TREEL-

HALL_GND
SREEL-
SREEL+

TOP/END_GND
DEW-

TAPE_LED_K
TAPE_LED_A

TAPE_END

TAPE_TOP

A
27P

B FP-228 LM_LOAD 1 DEW

FLEXIBLE M903 LM_LOAD 2
SENSOR
LOADING
MOTOR M LM_UNLOAD 3
DEW LM_UNLOAD 4 11
SENSOR
DEW+ 5 1-677-049-
DEW- 6

MODE A 7 Vcc - FP-228

MODE B 8

C
S902
MODE C

SW_COM
9

10
+ G
FLEXIBLE BOARD
S903 H902
MODE Q902
(CC DOWN) T REEL
SWITCH SENSOR
TAPE TOP
D901
SENSOR S902
(TAPE LED) Vcc - MODE SWITCH
FP-100
+ G
FLEXIBLE
Q901
CN901 TAPE END
4P H901 SENSOR
S REEL
D SENSOR

FP-102 S901
FLEXIBLE (REC PROOF)
16

MODE SWITCH, DEW SENSOR

4-61 FP-100, FP-228 / TAPE TOP/END SENSOR, S/T REEL
FP-102
DCR-PC4E/PC5/PC5E

CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK (FK-30350) PRINTED WIRING BOARD

— Ref. No. Control switch block (FK-30350) Board; 50,000 Series —
CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK (FK-30350) (SIDE A) CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK (FK-30350) (SIDE B)
S4007 S4004
FOCUS PHOTO
(FREEZE)

RV4001
T ZOOM
S4010 S4008 W
BACK LIGHT INFINITY S4005
PHOTO
(REC)
S4011
DISPLAY/TOUCH PANEL

S4003 39 1
SUPER NIGHTSHOT CN4002

CN4003
1 6

CN4004
SP901
SPEAKER

(L)
MIC901
(R)

J4001
S VIDEO

C Y
S S
G G

There are few cases that the part printed on this

diagram isn’t mounted in this model.
J4002
S4006
CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK
RESET
(FK-30350)
+

11

BT 4001
(LITHIUM BATTERY)

CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK CN4001

FK-30350 4-63 4-64
 DCR-PC4E/PC5/PC5E

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
SIGNAL PATH
CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK(FK-30350) VIDEO SIGNAL
-REF.NO.:50000 SERIES- AUDIO
A CHROMA Y Y/CHROMA SIGNAL

REC
PB

LND4002
CN4003 6P
SP901 GND
SPEAKER SP+ 1
FB4003
B J4001 C Y SP- 2 CN4002 39P

S VIDEO S S GND 3 1 SP+

VDR4003 (MIC L)
G G MIC-L 4 2 SP-
MIC901
GND 5 3 GND
(MIC R)
FB4004 MIC-R 6 4 MIC_L
VDR4004 5 GND
6 MIC_R
VDR4005 7 GND
C J4002 8 YG-GND
3HPR
9 S_Y_I/O
4HPIN FB4001
2HPL 10 S_C_I/O
(HEADPHONE) 1GND
FB4002 S4006 11 XS_JACK_IN
R4008 RESET
0 12 HP_JACK_IN
VDR4001 13 HP_R
VDR4002
BT4001 14 HP_L
(LITHIUM BATTERY)
15 GND
D GND
D4002
TLSU1008(T05,SOY)
16 XRESET_SW
R4006
(ACCESS) 1k 17 BATT_LI_3V
LND4005 TO
18 POWER_LED_VCC VC-245 BOARD(19/19)
CN002
19 MS_LED

PC5/PC5E ONLY CN4001 11P 20 BS (SEE PAGE

4-53)
CASE-GND 11 21 DI0
VSS 10 22 INS
BS 9 23 SCLK
E VCC 8 24 VCC

MEMORY DI0 7 25 VSS

STICK
CONNECTOR NC 6 26 XPHOTO_STBY_SW

INS 5 27 XCAM+STBY_SW

NC 4 28 XVTR_MODE_SW
SLCK 3 29 XEJECT_SW
VCC 2 30 XS/S_SW
R4007 560
VSS 1 31 POWER_LED_VCC
F 32 XPOWER_LED

CONTROL SWITCH 33 KEY_AD1

PHOTO
BLOCK(FK-30350) S4004
(FREEZE)
34 ZOOM_SW_AD
35 D_2.8V
POWER
36 PHOTO_FREEZE

VCR 37 KEY_AD0
LND4001 38 KEY_AD1R
OFF S4010
GND 39 GND
G CAMERA
PC5/PC5E ONLY
BACK LIGHT
LND4003

GND
MEMORY CN4004 8P
S4005
GND 1 S4007 R4003 LND4004
XVTR_MODE_SW 1200 PHOTO WIDE TELE
XPHOTO_STBY_SW 2 FOCUS 1608 (REC) GND
XCAM_MODE_SW RV4001
XCAM+STBY_SW 3 (ZOOM)
EJECT XPHOTO_STBY_SW
XVTR_MODE_SW 4 R4002
S4008 1500 R4001
XEJECT_SW 5 1608 3300
INFINITY 1608 S4003
H START/STOP
XS/S_SW

POWER_LED_VCC
6

7
SUPER NIGHTSHOT

XPOWER_LED 8 R4005
1200
(POWER)
16 S4011

DISPLAY/TOUCH PANEL

CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK

4-65 4-66 FK-30350
DCR-PC4E/PC5/PC5E

BJ-1 (JACK, BATTERY) PRINTED WIRING BOARD

— Ref. No. BJ-1 Board; 30,000 Series —

For printed wiring board

• Refer to page 4-82 for parts location.
• BJ-1 board consists of multiple layers. However, only
the sides (layers) A and B are shown.
• Chip parts

Diode
3

2 1

There are few cases that the part printed on this

diagram isn’t mounted in this model.

NS-12
(REMOTE COMMANDER RECEIVER)

VC-245
A/D CONVERTER, LENS DRIVER,
CAMERA SIGNAL PROCESSING,
DV SIGNAL PROCESSING,
DV INTERFACE, REC/PB AMP,
PS CONTROL, JPEG, MS INTERFACE,
LINE IN/OUT, EVF/RGB,
DRUM CAPSTAN MOTOR DRIVE,
MECHA CONTROL, HI CONTROL,
AUDIO IN/OUT, DC/DC CONVERTER

BJ-1
(JACK, BATTERY)

JACK, BATTERY
BJ-1 4-67 4-68
 DCR-PC4E/PC5/PC5E

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
NO MARK:REC/PB MODE
BJ-1 BOARD R :REC MODE
JACK,BATTERY P :PB MODE
A -REF.NO.: SERIES-
XX MARK:NO MOUNT

PC4E CN3102 4P

DV OUT TPA 4

NTPA 3
DV IN/OUT
B PC5/PC5E
TPB
NTPB
2
1
CN3103 60P
LND314
1 GND GND 2
GND
3 TPB+ TPA+ 4

R3103 R3101 5 TPB- TPA- 6

J3102 3 GND 0 0
2 7 GND GND 8
LANC_DC
(LANC) 5 JACK_IN
1 SIG 9 XLANC_JACK_IN LANC_DC 10
DIGITAL I/O
4 232C_TD 11 LANC_GND/232C_TD LANC_SIG_JACK 12
C R3102
R3105
015AZ8.2-TPL3
015AZ8.2-TPL3

0 13 GND GND 14
0
2

2
D3103
D3102

15 V_IO XAV_JACK_IN 16
VDR319
1

17 GND GND 18
1
19 R_IO L_IO 20
3 21 GND GND 22
2
D3101 23 EXT_MIC_L EXT_MIC_R 24
MAZJ200D0LS0
25 GND GND 26

27 IB GND 28
D 29 UNEG GND 30
FB3105
J3103 1 GND FB3104 31 UNEG GND 32
0uH 0uH
2 L
AUDIO/VIDEO 3 V 33 UNEG GND 34
4 BR
5 SW 35 UNEG GND 36
7 R
6 NC 37 UNEG2 GND 38
FB3106
1

0uH 39 UNEG2 GND 40

LND315 41 UNEG2 GND 42

2

GND 43 UNEG2 GND 44

E R3111
0 VDR311 VDR312 VDR313
R3110
0 45 UNEG3 GND 46

47 UNEG3 GND 48

49 UNEG3 GND 50
FB3101
51 UNEG3 GND 52
0uH FB3102
1 GND 0uH
J3101 2 L 53 UNEG4 GND 54
3 S
EXT MIC 55 UNEG4 GND 56
4 R
57 UNEG4 GND 58
FB3103 59 UNEG4 GND 60
F 0uH
VDR315
VDR316
2

C3101 TO VC-245 BOARD(19/19)

C3103
0.001u CN003
0.001u
1

B B
(SEE PAGE 4-54)

LND316

GND
R3112
LND311
0 SIGNAL PATH
G s IB VIDEO SIGNAL
AUDIO
LND312 PS3101
2A CHROMA Y Y/CHROMA SIGNAL
ACV+
REC
PS3102
BT001 2A
BATTERY PB
TERMINAL
PS3103
2A
Note : Note :
H PS3104 The components identified by Les composants identifiés par
2A
CN3104 mark 0 or dotted line with mark une marque 0 sont critiques
TO 2P
PD-126 BOARD
0 are critical for safety. pour la sécurité.
UNREG 1 LND313
(1/2) Replace only with part number Ne les remplacer que par une
CN2101 GND 2 GND
7 8 PIN specified. pièce portant le numéro spécifié.
(SEE PAGE
4-73)

16

JACK, BATTERY
4-69 4-70 BJ-1
DCR-PC4E/PC5/PC5E

PD-126 (LCD DRIVE) PRINTED WIRING BOARD

— Ref. No. PD-126 Board; 40,000 Series —

For printed wiring board CF-75

• Refer to page 4-82 for parts location. (CCD IMAGER)
• PD-126 board consists of multiple layers. However, only
the sides (layers) A and B are shown. PD-126
(LCD DRIVER)
• Chip parts PO-5
(PANEL OPEN)
Transistor PR-34
(PANEL REVERSE)
C 65 4
INVERTER
TRANSFORMER UNIT

B E 12 3

There are few cases that the part printed on this

diagram isn’t mounted in this model.

LCD DRIVE
PD-126 4-71 4-72
 DCR-PC4E/PC5/PC5E

For Schematic Diagram

• Refer to page 4-77 for waveforms.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

PD-126 BOARD(1/2) SIGNAL PATH

LCD DRIVE VIDEO SIGNAL
A -REF.NO.:30000 SERIES-
L2105
XX
2520 CHROMA Y Y/CHROMA
XX MARK:NO MOUNT
L2103
NO MARK:REC/PB MODE 10uH R2161 REC
2520 XX
PB
C2115 R2165
CN2100 Q2102,2104

C2114
3.3u

0.01u
20V 0 SWITCH
PANEL_B 1 Q2104
TA R2162
A NDS356AP
PANEL_G 2 15.1 15.1 0
C2112

BGP

BLK

PRG

FRP

PFRP
B PANEL_R 3 C2130 R2114 2.2u

VB

VR

VG

VP
0.01u 15k 2012 VP R2144 C2125
REG_GND 4 470k 0.01u
0
PANEL_2.8V 5 0.7 1.2 2.7 0 2.8 1.4 1.4 2.8 6.8 1.7 14.4 C2123
TO C2124
VC-245 BOARD 3.3u
PANEL_13.5V

R2155
6 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 20V 0.01u
(12/19) TA A R2147 R2151

XX
CN005 PANEL_4.6V 7 0 XX

R_INJECT

EXT_DA

N.C

BGP

BLACK_IN

PRG

FRP

PFRP

VP

P_DC_DET

Vcc2
XVP.SAVE
XHI_SCK 0
(SEE PAGE XHI_SCK 8
4-39) XCS_PANEL TG14 2.8
XCS_PANEL 9
XHI_SO R2111
HI_SO 10

R2138 100
1.2
Q2102

R2134 10

R2136 10

R2137 10
470k 6.8 VB
UN9213J-(TX).SO
C

37

24
REG_GND 11

XVD 12
XVD
XC.SAVE 2.8
C_BG/N.C
6 VB
1.7 C2118
2.2u
TG15

D2105

38

23
XHD TG16 XX
XHD 13 XC.SAVE B_DC_DET
XHI_SCK 2.5 6.8 VG Q2107
5 XX

39

22
PANEL_15.5V 14
XSCK VG Q2105
XTG_SO 2.6
IC2101 1.7 C2119
2.2u
XX

40

21
CN2101 8P
SI G_DC_DET
TO TP_R 1 XCS_PANEL 2.9 RGB DRIVE 6.8 VR C2128
L2101
4 C2126 0.1u

41

20
VC-245 BOARD 4.7u
(19/19) 22uH C2102 XCS VR R2152
TP_L 2 3216
CN006 2520 0.1u 2.8 1.7 C2120 XX
2.2u R2159 150k

42

19
N.C. 3 24 TEST1
(SEE PAGE Vcc1 R_DC_DET
D 4-53) TP_BOT 4
R2168
0
R2169
0 1.2 IC2101
RB5P004AM1 23 COM

43

18
C2101 TG24 R2153 0
R2110 TRAP_ADJ GND2

XX

C2106 XX
TP_TOP 5 22u 22 VST

B
6.3V XX 2.8

C2103
TG23

44

17
N.C. 6 TA R2171 21 VCK

R2109
0.01u
TO A LPF_ADJ GND1 XX
2.8 TG22
BJ-1 BOARD UNREG 7 XP.SAVE 6.7 20 EN
1 D2103

45

16
CN3104 TG21 XX
UNREG_GND 8 C2108 XP.SAVE VREF C2137 19 DWN
(SEE PAGE R2173 0 0.01u 1.8 14.4 XX

46

15
4-69) R2172 18 VDD
C2109 B_IN Vcc3
CN2103 7P R2174 0 0.01u 1.8 2 6.2
0 R2150
XX D2104
RD3.3UM-T1B
17 VSS

47

14
LCD901
N.C. 1 G_IN COM_OUT 16 VDDG 2.5 INCH
R2175 0 C2110 1.8 R2127
XX
E 0.01u
3
6.2 XX TG13 R2139 COLOR LCD UNIT

48

13
TP_R 2 15 VVSSG
R_IN COM_IN R2140 XX 0
TG12 C2129 C2133 1u
TP_L 3 14 CS
TOUCH C2134 C2136 TG20 (Note)

XSH.SAVE
XX XX C2121 C2122
N.C.

COM_DC
PANEL 4 13 WIDE

OP_OUT
XX XX

OP_IN+

OP_IN-
BLOCK F TG18

SH_R

SH_G
F

SH_B

SH_A
TP_BOT

BIAS
5 12 HST

VCO
N.C
TG11 R2141 XX
TP_TOP 6 11 REF
C2135 R2126 R2128 TG10 R2142 XX
N.C. 7 XX 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 10 SOUT
XX XX
R2123 0 TG19
2.8 2.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0 1.4 1.4 1.4 1.6 3.2 6.5 9 CRext
TG17
8 HCK2
F UNREG TG16 R2163 0

SH1

SH2

SH3

SH4

R2117
R2115

68k
2700
R2124 D2102 7 HCK1
UNREG_GND 100k R2145 XX
C2113 1T369-01-T8A 6 PSIG
PANEL_4.6V 0.1u
2012 C2116 5 G
PWM R2176 R2116 0.001u
TO(2/2) 0 47k R2119 R2122 L2104 4 R
BL_ON 68k 1M 2.7uH 3 B
BL_LEV TG15 R2146 0
R2118 C2111 2 RGT
DET 22k 560p R2125 R2177 R2178
CH XX C2117 100k 100k 1 TEST2
LED_ON/OFF R2180
100p 100k
CH CN2104 24P
G L2102
C2104
10u C2105
R2179
100k R2148
10uH 6.3V 0.1u 15.1
10k
2520 TA
P 7.3

6.8 7.3

XC.SAVE

XP.SAVE
CN2105 5P
Q2103
XP4601-TXE 1 VG
15.1 6.8 6.8 2 COM
3 GND CPC

SH1

SH2

SH3

SH4
C2131
H C2107 R2170
100k
XX
6.8

Q2101
6.2
4 PSIG (FOR CHECK)
0.1u
R2113 1608 2.8 XP4601-TXE C2138 5 HSY
0 Q2111 XX
6.2 1608
0 2SD2216J-QR(K8).SO
2.8 2.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 2.8 1.4 2.8 1.3 1.3 2.8
R2143
R2112 10k
36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25
470k R2129
0
XCLR

SHR

SHG

SHB

SHA

GND

TESTI

RPD

OSCI

OSCO

XSTBY
XCSAVE
D2101 C2132
MA111-TX XX
I BGP 2.7 0 TG24
R2154
XX
R2160
820k
8
37

24
XCLP VST

2SB1462J-QR(K8).SO
2.8 TG23
PRG 2.8 TG43 R2157
38

23
1M
PRG VCK
0 TG22 R2149

Q2109
BLK 0.8 XX
39

22
TG47
SBLK EN
FRP 1.4
IC2103 1.9 TG21
40

21
FRP DWN R2158
1.4 TIMING GENERATOR 1.2 TG20
PFRP 68k
41

20
PFRP WIDE
J XHI_SCK
2.5 2.7 TG19 Q2106 Q2108 C2127
42

19
XX XX
XSCK VDD 0.1u
IC2103 R2135 TG18
2.5 1.6
CXD3505R-T4 XX
43

18
VDD HST
2.9 TG17
XCS_PANEL 0.1
44

17
XCS HCK2
TG16
Note:Short is mounted to the location
2.6
XTG_SO 0 where C2129 is printed.
45

SO HCK1 16
Q2112 2.2 TG15
XHI_SO 0
LED ON/OFF SW,
46

15

BUFFER SI RGT
2.6 TG14
K Q2112 R2166 2.8
47

14

10k VDO POFF

XP4313-(TX).SO
4.5 2.8
XVD 9 0 TG13
48

13

XVD NC
0 0.1
2.7

7
DETIN
XWRT

TESTI

PWM

TEST

TEST

TEST
HDO

GND

LED
HD

BL

2.8

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

L 2.6 2.6 2.7 2.8 0 2.2 1.8 1.0 2.8 TG12

TG11

TG10

XHD
TG47

TG43

M
16

LCD DRIVE
4-73 4-74 PD-126 (1/2)
DCR-PC4E/PC5/PC5E

For Schematic Diagram

• Refer to page 4-71 for printed wiring board.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

PD-126 BOARD(2/2)
LCD DRIVE
A -REF.NO.:30000 SERIES-
XX MARK:NO MOUNT
NO MARK:REC/PB MODE

L2181 Q2181,2182
SWITCH LND281
4.7uH
DUMY_LND
UNREG PANEL_UNREG
R2186
XX

B L2182
100uH LND282
4.5 4.5
PANEL_4.6V VDD BL_HI
R2181 Q2182
4700 2SA1832F-Y/GR(TPL3)
3.8

C2181 C2183
100u C2185 R2182
C2182 100u C2184 10u C2186 1k
6.3V 6.3V 0 ND901
0.1u 0.1u 10V 0.1u INVERTER UNIT BACK-LIGHT
B B B B
TA TA A 2.7
Q2181
C UN9214J-(K8).SO
BL_GND
LND283

TO(1/2) UNREG_GND UNREG_GND

BL_ON
BL_LOW
R2184
0 LND284
PWM BL_PWM
Q2183
R2185 UN9112J-(K8).SO LND285
XX
D BL_LEV DET
4.5 1.5 R2183
100 D2181
PG1111R-TR
4.5
Q2183
LED_ON/OFF LED DRIVER

DET

E
Note : Note :
The components identified by Les composants identifiés par
16
mark 0 or dotted line with mark une marque 0 sont critiques
0 are critical for safety. pour la sécurité.
Replace only with part number Ne les remplacer que par une
specified. pièce portant le numéro spécifié.

LCD DRIVE
PD-126 (2/2) 4-75 4-76
 DCR-PC4E/PC5/PC5E

4-3. WAVEFORMS

CF-75 BOARD PD-126 BOARD (1/2)

CAMERA REC REC/PB

1 IC3201 1 1 IC2101 rh 9 IC2103 rk

2.8Vp-p
7.7Vp-p 400mVp-p
H V
H

2 IC3201 2 2 IC2101 rj

9.2Vp-p 400mVp-p
V H

3 IC3201 3 3 IC2101 rk

7.8Vp-p
450mVp-p
H
H

4 IC3201 4 4 IC2101 w;

8.6Vp-p
V 7.4Vp-p
2H

5 IC3201 qd 5 IC2101 ws

20.8Vp-p
H 7.4Vp-p
2H

6 IC3201 qa, qs 6 IC2101 wf

3.5Vp-p 7.4Vp-p
H 2H

7 IC3201 0 7 IC2103 1

2.8Vp-p
3.2Vp-p H
55.6 nsec

8 Q3201 E 8 IC2103 wh

1.0Vp-p
3.0Vp-p
0.44 µsec
56 nsec

WAVEFORMS
4-77 CF-75, PD-126
Waveforms and parts location of the VC-245 board are not shown.
Pages from 4-78 to 4-81 are not shown.
DCR-PC4E/PC5/PC5E

4-4. MOUNTED PARTS LOCATION

CF-75 BOARD (SIDE A) NS-12 BOARD (SIDE A) BJ-1 BOARD (SIDE A) PD-126 BOARD (SIDE A)
C2201 B-4 R2201 B-4 D003 A-2 C3101 A-2 C2101 C-1 Q2108 B-1
C2202 B-4 R2202 B-4 D005 A-2 C3103 A-2 C2102 D-1 Q2109 B-3
C2203 B-4 R2203 E-1 D006 A-1 C2103 D-1 Q2111 C-2
C3201 C-6 R2204 B-4 CN3102 C-3 C2104 C-1 Q2112 B-3
C3202 C-7 R2205 E-1 IC001 A-1 CN3103 B-6 C2105 C-1 Q2181 C-3
C3203 C-7 R2206 E-1 CN3104 F-9 C2106 D-1 Q2182 D-3
C3205 C-7 R2207 E-1 C2107 C-1 Q2183 B-3
C3206 C-7 R2208 E-1 D3101 C-2 C2108 D-1
C3207 C-6 R2209 E-1 D3102 C-2 C2109 D-1 R2109 D-1
C3208 A-4 R2210 E-1 D3103 C-2 C2110 C-1 R2110 D-1
C3454 E-3 R2211 E-1 C2111 C-2 R2111 D-1
C3455 E-3 R2212 E-1 FB3101 A-2 C2112 D-2 R2112 C-1
C3456 E-3 R2213 E-1 FB3102 A-2 C2113 C-2 R2113 B-1
C3457 E-3 R2214 E-4 FB3103 A-2 C2114 D-2 R2114 D-2
C3458 E-3 R2215 E-4 FB3104 B-2 C2115 D-3 R2115 C-2
C3459 E-3 R2216 E-4 FB3105 B-2 C2116 C-2 R2116 C-2
C3460 E-4 R2217 E-4 FB3106 B-2 C2117 C-2 R2117 C-2
C3461 E-4 R2218 E-4 C2118 D-2 R2118 C-2
R3201 C-7 J3101 G-2 C2119 D-3 R2119 C-2
CN2202 E-1 R3202 C-7 J3102 E-2 C2120 D-2 R2122 C-2
CN3351 A-4 R3351 A-4 J3103 F-2 C2121 C-2 R2123 C-3
CN3353 A-4 R3452 E-3 C2122 C-2 R2124 C-2
R3453 E-3 PS3101 E-9 C2123 C-3 R2125 C-2
IC3201 D-6 R3454 E-3 PS3102 E-9 C2124 C-3 R2126 C-3
IC3451 E-4 R3455 E-4 PS3103 E-9 C2125 C-3 R2127 D-3
R3456 E-4 PS3104 E-9 C2126 B-3 R2128 C-3
L3201 C-7 R3457 E-4 C2127 C-3 R2129 C-2
R3459 E-4 R3101 B-1 C2128 B-3 R2134 C-3
Q2202 B-4 R3102 C-2 C2129 B-2 R2135 C-2
Q2203 E-1 S2201 E-5 R3103 B-2 C2130 D-1 R2136 C-2
Q2204 E-1 R3105 C-2 C2131 C-2 R2137 C-3
Q2205 E-1 R3110 B-1 C2132 C-1 R2138 C-3
Q2206 E-1 R3111 B-2 C2133 B-2 R2139 B-2
Q2207 B-4 R3112 A-2 C2134 D-1 R2140 B-2
Q3201 C-7 C2135 D-1 R2141 B-2
Q3202 C-7 VDR311 B-2 C2136 C-1 R2142 B-2
VDR312 B-2 C2137 D-2 R2144 C-3
VDR313 B-2 C2138 C-3 R2145 C-3
VDR315 A-2 C2181 C-3 R2146 B-1
CF-75 BOARD (SIDE B) VDR316 A-2 C2182 B-3 R2147 C-3
C3204 C-9 VDR319 C-2 C2183 C-3 R2148 C-3
C3452 E-12 C2184 C-3 R2149 B-2
C3453 E-12 C2185 C-3 R2150 B-3
C3462 E-12 C2186 D-3 R2151 C-2
C3463 E-12 R2152 B-3
C3464 E-12 CN2100 C-1 R2153 B-3
C3465 E-12 CN2101 B-1 R2154 B-3
C3466 E-12 CN2103 B-3 R2155 A-3
CN2104 B-2 R2157 B-3
CN2201 E-15 CN2105 D-3 R2158 C-3
CN3354 B-10 R2159 B-3
D2101 C-1 R2160 B-3
L3451 E-12 D2102 C-2 R2161 B-3
D2103 B-2 R2162 B-2
R3451 E-12 D2104 B-2 R2163 C-2
R3458 E-12 D2105 B-3 R2165 B-3
D2181 A-3 R2166 B-3
SE3450 E-12 R2168 D-1
SE3451 E-12 IC2101 D-2 R2169 D-1
IC2103 B-2 R2170 C-2
TH2201 E-15 R2171 D-3
L2101 C-1 R2172 B-3
L2102 C-1 R2173 D-1
L2103 D-2 R2174 D-1
L2104 C-2 R2175 C-1
L2105 B-1 R2176 C-2
L2181 C-3 R2177 B-3
L2182 C-3 R2178 C-2
R2179 C-2
Q2101 D-3 R2180 C-2
Q2102 C-3 R2181 D-3
Q2103 C-3 R2182 D-3
Q2104 C-3 R2183 A-4
Q2105 C-2 R2184 B-2
Q2106 B-2 R2185 D-2
Q2107 B-1 R2186 D-3

PARTS LOCATION
CF-75, NS-12, BJ-1, PD-126 4-82E
 DCR-PC4E/PC5/PC5E

SECTION 5
ADJUSTMENTS
1. Before starting adjustment

EVR Data Re-writing Procedure When Replacing Board

The data that is stored in the repair board, is not necessarily correct.
Perform either procedure 1 or procedure 2 or procedure 3 when replacing board.

Procedure 1
Save the EVR data of the machine in which a board is going to be replaced. Download the saved data after a board
is replaced.

(Machine before starting repair) PC PC (Machine after a board is replaced)

Save the EVR data Download the saved

to a personal computer. data to a machine.

Procedure 2
Remove the EEPROM from the board of the machine that is going to be repaired. Install the removed EEPROM
to the replaced board.
Remove the EEPROM and install it.

(Former board) (New board)

Procedure 3
When the data cannot be saved due to defective EEPROM, or when the EEPROM cannot be removed or
installed, save the data from the same model of the same destination, and download it.
(Machine to be repaired) PC (Machine to be repaired)

Download the data.

Save the data.

(The same model of the same destination)

After the EVR data is saved and downloaded, check the

respective items of the EVR data.
(Refer to page 5-3 for the items to be checked.)

5-1
1-1. Adjusting items when replacing main parts and boards.
• Adjusting items when replacing main parts
When replacing main parts, adjust the items indicated by z in the following table.
Note1: When replacing the drum assy. or the mechanism deck, reset the data of page: 2, address: A2 to A4 to “00”. (Refer to “Record of Use check” of “5-
4. SERVICE MODE”)
Replaced parts
Block replacement Parts replacement

SE3450/3451 (PITCH/YAW sensor)

IC2103 (Timing generator (LCD))

IC1803 (Timing generator (EVF))

Color EVF block LED902 (Back light LED (EVF))

ND901 (Fluorescent tube (LCD))

IC702, X701 (Timing generator)

IC101 (EQ, A/D CONV., PLL)

IC701 (CDS, AGC, A/D conv.)

IC751 (Camera process, EVR)

IC1301 (LINE IN/OUT AMP)
LCD901 (LCD panel (LCD))
Color EVF block LCD902 (LCD panel (EVF))

IC1802 (RGB driver (EVF))

IC2101 (RGB driver (LCD))

IC301 (DV signal process)

Mechanism deck M901 (Drum assy) Note1

IC204 (Lens pre-driver)

IC102 (REC/PB AMP)

Mechanism deck M902 (Capstan motor)

IC3201 (CCD imager)

Inverter unit (LCD)

(FK-30350)
Adjustment
Adjustment

Touch panel
Section
Mechanism deck Note1

Control switch board

VC-245 board
VC-245 board

VC-245 board

VC-245 board
VC-245 board
VC-245 board

VC-245 board
VC-245 board
VC-245 board

VC-245 board
PD-126 board
PD-126 board

CF-75 board
CF-75 board
Lens device

LCD block
LCD block
LCD block
LCD block

Initialization Initialization of C, D, 8 page data

of B, C, D, E, Initialization of B page data *1
F, 7, 8 page data Initialization of E, F, 7 page data
36MHz origin oscillation adj. z z
Zoom key center adj. z
HALL adj. z z
Flange back adj. z z z z
Optical axis adj. z z
Camera Color reproduction adj. z z
MAX GAIN adj. z z
AWB & LV standard data input z z
Auto white balance adj. z z
Mechanical shutter adj. z
Steady shot check z
VCO adj. z
Bright adj. z
Color EVF
Contrast adj. z z
White balance adj. z z z z
VCO adj. z
Bright adj. z
Black limit adj. z
LCD Contrast adj. z z
Center level adj. z
V-COM adj. z z
White balance adj. z z z z z
Serial No. input
System control
Touch panel adj. z
CAP FG duty adj. z z z
PLL fo & LPF fo adj. z z z z
Servo, RF Switching position adj. z z
AGC center level adj. z z z z
APC & AEQ adj. z z z z
Chroma BPF fo adj. z
Video S VIDEO OUT Y level adj. z z
S VIDEO OUT Cr, Cb level adj. z z
Mechanism Tape path adj. z z z

Table. 5-1-1(1).

5-2
• Adjusting items when replacing a board or EEPROM
When replacing a board or EEPROM, adjust the items indicated by z in the following table.

Board *1: DCR-PC5/PC5E model only

replacement

IC1407 (Flash memory) *1

IC801 (EEPROM)
IC502 (EEPROM)
Adjustment

(COMPLETE)
(COMPLETE)
(COMPLETE)
Adjustment
Section

VC-245 board

VC-245 board
VC-245 board
VC-245 board
PD-126 board
CF-75 board

Initialization Initialization of C, D, 8 page data z z

of B, C, D, E, Initialization of B page data *1 z z
F, 7, 8 page data Initialization of E, F, 7 page data z z
36MHz origin oscillation adj. z z
Zoom key center adj. z z
HALL adj. z z
Flange back adj. z z
Optical axis adj. z z
Camera Color reproduction adj. z z
MAX GAIN adj. z z
AWB & LV standard data input z z
Auto white balance adj. z z
Mechanical shutter adj. z z
Steady shot check z z z
VCO adj. z z
Bright adj. z z
Color EVF
Contrast adj. z z
White balance adj. z z
VCO adj. z z z
Bright adj. z z z
Black limit adj. z z z
LCD Contrast adj. z z z
Center level adj. z z z
V-COM adj. z z z
White balance adj. z z z
Serial No. input z z
System control
Touch panel adj. z z
CAP FG duty adj. z z
PLL fo & LPF fo adj. z z
Servo, RF Switching position adj. z z
AGC center level adj. z z
APC & AEQ adj. z z
Chroma BPF fo adj. z z
Video S VIDEO OUT Y level adj. z z
S VIDEO OUT Cr, Cb level adj. z z
Mechanism Tape path adj.

Table. 5-1-1(2).

5-3
5-1. CAMERA SECTION ADJUSTMENT
1-1. PREPARATIONS BEFORE ADJUSTMENT (CAMERA SECTION)

1-1-1. List of Service Tools

• Oscilloscope • Color monitor • Vectorscope
• Regulated power supply • Digital voltmeter
Ref. No. Name Parts Code Usage
Auto white balance adjustment/check
J-1 Filter for color temperature correction (C14) J-6080-058-A
White balance adjustment/check
ND filter 1.0 J-6080-808-A White balance check
J-2 ND filter 0.4 J-6080-806-A White balance check
ND filter 0.1 J-6080-807-A White balance check
J-3 Pattern box PTB-450 J-6082-200-A
J-4 Color chart for pattern box J-6020-250-A
Adjustment remote commander (RM-95 upgraded).
J-5 J-6082-053-B
(Note 1)
J-6 Siemens star chart J-6080-875-A For checking the flange back
J-7 Clear chart for pattern box J-6080-621-A
For adjusting the video section
J-8 CPC-6 flexible jig (Note 2) J-6082-370-B
For adjusting the color viewfinder
For adjusting the video section
J-9 CPC-6 terminal board jig J-6082-371-A
For adjusting the color viewfinder
J-10 Mini pattern box J-6082-353-B For adjusting the flange back
J-11 Camera table J-6082-384-A For adjusting the flange back

Note 1: If the micro processor IC in the adjustment remote commander is Note 2: When using the old CPC-6 flexible jig (J-6082-370-A), open the
not the new micro processor (UPD7503G-C56-12), the pages cabinet (R) assembly.
cannot be switched. In this case, replace with the new micro
processor (8-759-148-35).

J-1 J-2 J-3 J-4 J-5

J-6 J-7 J-8 J-9 J-10

J-11

Fig. 5-1-1.

5-4
1-1-2. Preparations
Note 1: For details of how remove the cabinet and boards, refer to “2.
DISASSEMBLY”.
Note 2: When performing only the adjustments, the lens block and boards Pattern box
need not be disassembled.

1) Connect the equipment for adjustments according to Fig. 5-1-2.

Note 3: As removing the control switch block (FK-30350)(removing the

VC-245 board CN002) means removing the lithium 3V power
supply (BT4001), data such as date, time, user-set menus will be 1.5 m
lost. After completing adjustments, reset these data. If the cabinet
(R) has been removed, the self-diagnosis data, data on history of
use (total drum rotation time etc. ) will be lost. Before removing,
note down the self-diagnosis data (data of page:2, address: B0 to
C6) and the data on history use (data of page: 2, address: A2 to
AA). (Refer to “SELF-DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION” for the self-
diagnosis data, and to “5-4.Service Mode” for the data on the
history use.)
Front of the lens
Note 4: Setting the “Forced Camera Power ON” Mode
1) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 01.
2) Select page: D, address: 10, set data: 01, and press the PAUSE
button of the adjustment remote commander.
The above procedure will enable the camera power to be turned
on with the control switch block (FK-30350) removed. After
completing adjustments, be sure to exit the “Forced Camera Power
ON Mode”. Fig. 5-1-2.

Note 5: Exiting the “Forced Camera Power ON” Mode

1) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 01.
2) Select page: D, address: 10, set data: 00, and press the PAUSE
button of the adjustment remote commander.
3) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 00.

5-5
 Cabinet (R)

Must be connected when

performing the LCD system
adjustments.

PO-5 board

CPC-6 terminal board jig

(J-6082-371-A)

Lens block

CN3351 View finder

CF-75
CN3353 board
NS-12 CN3354 CN002
board CN001
CN009 CN004
CPC-6 flexible jig
(J-6082-370-B)
CN005
Adjustment remote
commander VC-245 board
CN006

CN003
Must be connected when performing
the video or EVF system adjustments.

Must be connected.

J310
AUDIO/VIDEO
jack
J3101
CN3103

J3102 Battery terminal

LANC jack
CN3102 BJ-1 board
CN3104

VIDEO
(Yellow)
Terminated at 75Ω
AUDIO Left
(White)
Color monitor Vector scope AC power adaptor
AUDIO Right
(Red)
AC-VF10 or
AC-VQ11

Fig. 5-1-3.

5-6
1-1-3. Precaution
1. Setting the Switch
Unless otherwise specified, set the switches as follows and perform adjustments without loading cassette.

1. POWER (Control switch block) ............................ CAMERA CAMERA SET of the MENU settings
2. NIGHT SHOT (Lens block) ............................................ OFF DIGITAL ZOOM .................................................. OFF
3. FUNCTION settings of the touch panel 16:9 WIDE ............................................................ OFF
DIGITAL EFFECT ..................................................... OFF STEADY SHOT ................................................... OFF
EXPOSURE ................................................................ OFF SETUP MENU of the MENU settings
MANUAL SET of the MENU settings DEMO MODE ...................................................... OFF
PROGRAM AE ................................................ AUTO 4. FOCUS (FK-30350 block) .......................................... Manual
PICTURE EFFECT .............................................. OFF 5. BACK LIGHT (FK-30350 block) .................................... OFF
WHITE BALANCE .......................................... AUTO

2. Order of Adjustments
Basically carry out adjustments in the order given.

Color bar chart (Color reproduction adjustment frame )

Electronic beam scanning frame
H
Yellow

Magenta
White
Cyan
Green

C C=D D
Red
Blue

Magenta
Yellow

Green
White
Cyan

Blue
Red
CRT picture frame

V
A B A=B B A
Fig. b (TV monitor picture)
Fig. a Enlargement
(Video output terminal
output waveform)
Difference in level

Adjust the camera zoom and direction to

obtain the output waveform shown in Fig. a
B A and the TV monitor display shown in Fig. b.

Fig.5-1-4.

3. Subjects
1) Color bar chart (Color reproduction adjustment frame)
When performing adjustments using the color bar chart, adjust
the picture frame as shown in Fig. 5-1-4. (Color reproduction White
adjustment frame)
2) Clear chart (Color reproduction adjustment frame) 841mm
Remove the color bar chart from the pattern box and insert a Black
clear chart in its place. (Do not perform zoom operations during
this time.)
3) Flange back adjustment chart
1189mm
Make the chart shown in Fig. 5-1-5 using A0 size (1189mm ×
841mm) black and white vellum paper.
Fig. 5-1-5.

Note: Use matte vellum paper bigger than A0, and make sure the edges of
the black and white paper joined together are not rough.

5-7
1-2. INITIALIZATION OF B, C, D, E, F, 7, 8 PAGE Processing after Completing Modification of C, D, 8 Page data
DATA Order Page Address Data Procedure
1 2 00 29 Set the data
1-2-1. INITIALIZATION OF C, D, 8 PAGE DATA
2 2 01 29 Set the data, and press the
PAUSE button.
1. Initializing the C, D, 8 Page Data
Note: If the following symptoms occur after completing of the
Note1: If “Initializing the C, D, 8 Page Data” is performed, all data of the
“Modification of C, D, 8 page data”, check that the data of the
C page, D page and 8 page will be initialized. (It is impossible to
“Fixed data-2” addresses of D page are same as those of the same
initialize a single page.)
model of the same destination.
Note2: If the C, D, 8 page data has been initialized, the following
1) The battery end mark on the LCD or viewfinder screen is
adjustments need to be performed again.
flashing.
1) Modification of C, D, 8 page data
2) The power is shut off so that unit cannot operate.
2) Serial No. input
3) Servo and RF system adjustments
4) Video system adjustments 3. C Page Table
5) Color viewfinder system adjustments
6) LCD system Adjustments Note: Fixed data-1: Initialized data. (Refer to “1. Initializing the C, D, 8
Page Data”.)
Fixed data-2: Modified data. (Refer to “2. Modification of C, D, 8
Adjusting page C Page Data”.)
Adjusting Address 10 to FF
Adjusting page D Address Remark
Initial value
Adjusting Address 10 to FF 00 to 0F
Adjusting page 8 10 EE Switching position adj.
Adjusting Address 00 to FF 11 00
12 00
Initializing Method:
13 00
Order Page Address Data Procedure 14 to 15 Fixed data-1
1 0 01 01 Set the data 16 E0 Cap FG duty adj.
2 3 81 Check that the data is “00”. 17 Fixed data-2
3 3 80 0A Set the data, and press the 18 2A AEQ adj.
PAUSE button. 19 2A
4 3 80 Check that the data changes to 1A Fixed data-1
“1A” 1B 32 AEQ adj.
5 Perform “Modification of C, D, 1C 32
8 Page Data”.
1D Fixed data-1
2. Modification of C, D, 8 Page Data 1E 25 AGC center level adj.
If the C, D, 8 page data has been initialized, change the data of the 1F 3E PLL fo adj.
“Fixed data-2” address shown in the following tables by manual 20 3E
input. 21 D5 APC adj.
22 99 LPF fo adj.
Modifying Method:
23 to 24 Fixed data-1
1) Before changing the data, select page: 0, address: 01, and set
data: 01. 25 88 S VIDEO out Y level adj.
2) New data for changing are not shown in the tables because 26 E3 S VIDEO out Cr level adj.
they are different in destination. When changing the data, copy 27 A1 S VIDEO out Cb level adj.
the data built in the same model. 28 04 Chroma BPF fo adj.
Note: If copy the data built in the different model, the camcorder may
29 20 PLL fo fine adj.
not operate.
3) When changing the data, press the PAUSE button of the 2A to 2B Fixed data-1
adjustment remote commander each time when setting new 2C 03 APC adj.
data to write the data in the non-volatile memory. 2D to 3F Fixed data-1(Initialized data)
4) Check that the data of adjustment addresses is the initial value. 40 Fixed data-2
If not, change the data to the initial value.
41 Fixed data-1
42 Fixed data-2
43 to 48 Fixed data-1(Initialized data)
49 Fixed data-2
4A
4B to 4C Fixed data-1
4D Fixed data-2
4E to 4F Fixed data-1
50 Fixed data-2
51

5-8
Address Remark Address Remark
Initial value Initial value
52 to 63 Fixed data-1 DE to E3 Fixed data-1
64 Fixed data-2 E4 Fixed data-2
65 to 85 Fixed data-1 E5 (Modified data. Copy the data built in
86 Fixed data-2 E6 the same model.)
87 (Modified data. Copy the data built in E7 Fixed data-1
88 the same model.) E8 08 Serial No. input
89 E9 00
8A to 9A Fixed data-1 EA 46
9B Fixed data-2 EB 01
9C (Modified data. Copy the data built in EC 01
9D the same model.) ED 00
9E EE 00
9F EF 00
A0 F0 to F3 Fixed data-1
A1 to A2 Fixed data-1 F4 00 Emergency memory address
A3 Fixed data-2 F5 00
A4 (Modified data. Copy the data built in F6 00
A5 the same model.) F7 00
A6 F8 00
A7 F9 00
A8 FA 00
A9 to AA Fixed data-1 FB 00
AB Fixed data-2 FC 00
AC (Modified data. Copy the data built in FD 00
AD the same model.) FE 00
AE Fixed data-1 FF 00
AF Fixed data-2 Table. 5-1-2.
B0
B1 Fixed data-1
B2 Fixed data-2
B3 (Modified data. Copy the data built in
B4 the same model.)
B5
B6
B7
B8
B9
BA
BB to C1 Fixed data-1
C2 Fixed data-2
C3 (Modified data. Copy the data built in
C4 the same model.)
C5
C6
C7
C8 to CB Fixed data-1
CC Fixed data-2
CD to D5 Fixed data-1
D6 Fixed data-2
D7 (Modified data. Copy the data built in
D8 the same model.)
D9
DA
DB
DC
DD

5-9
4. D Page Table
Address Initial value Remark
Note: Fixed data-1: Initialized data. (Refer to “1. Initializing the C, D, 8
Page Data”.) NTSC PAL
Fixed data-2: Modified data. (Refer to “2. Modification of C, D, 8 58 Fixed data-2
Page Data”.) 59 (Modified data. Copy the data built in
5A the same model.)
Address Initial value Remark 5B
NTSC PAL 5C
00 to 0F 5D
10 00 00 Test mode 5E to 60 Fixed data-1
11 to 12 Fixed data-1 61 Fixed data-2
13 Fixed data-2 62 to 63 Fixed data-1
14 64 Fixed data-2
15 to 19 Fixed data-1 65 (Modified data. Copy the data built in
1A Fixed data-2 66 the same model.)
1B to 1C Fixed data-1 67
1D Fixed data-2 68
1E (Modified data. Copy the data built in 69 Fixed data-1
1F the same model.) 6A Fixed data-2
20 6B to 8D Fixed data-1
21 8E Fixed data-2
22 8F (Modified data. Copy the data built in
23 90 the same model.)
24 91
25 92 3B 58 [4B] VCO adj. (EVF)
26 93 58 3B [20] [ ] : DCR-PC4E
27 94 Fixed data-2
28 95 8F 8F Bright adj.(EVF)
29 96 Fixed data-2
2A 97 80 80 White balance adj. (EVF)
2B 98 80 80
2C 99 38 38 Contrast adj. (EVF)
2D 9A Fixed data-1
2E 9B Fixed data-2
2F 9C (Modified data. Copy the data built in
30 9D the same model.)
31 to 32 Fixed data-1 9E
33 Fixed data-2 9F
34 to 41 Fixed data-1 A0
42 Fixed data-2 A1
43 (Modified data. Copy the data built in A2 5C 7E VCO adj. (LCD)
44 the same model.) A3 7E 5C
45 A4 A2 A2 V-COM adj. (LCD)
46 to 47 Fixed data-1 A5 B0 B0 Bright adj. (LCD)
48 Fixed data-2 A6 08 08 Black limit adj. (LCD)
49 A7 Fixed data-2
4A to 4C Fixed data-1 A8 90 90 White balance adj. (LCD)
4D Fixed data-2 A9 6F 6F
4E AA 2D 2D Contrast adj. (LCD)
4F Fixed data-1 AB 2D 2D Center level adj. (LCD)
50 Fixed data-2 AC Fixed data-2
51 (Modified data. Copy the data built in AD (Modified data. Copy the data built in
52 the same model.) AE the same model.)
53 AF
54 B0
55 B1
56 B2
57 Fixed data-1 B3 Fixed data-1

5-10
 5. 8 Page Table
Address Initial value Remark
Note: Fixed data-1: Initialized data. (Refer to “1. Initializing the C, D, 8
NTSC PAL Page Data”.)
B4 Fixed data-2 Fixed data-2: Modified data. (Refer to “2. Modification of C, D, 8
B5 Page Data”.)
B6 Fixed data-1
Address Remark
B7
B8 00 to 52 Fixed data-1
B9 Fixed data-2 53 Fixed data-2
BA 54 to 59 Fixed data-1
BB to C1 Fixed data-1 5A Fixed data-2
C2 Fixed data-2 5B (Modified data. Copy the data built in the same
C3 to C5 Fixed data-1 model.)
C6 Fixed data-2 5C to 98 Fixed data-1
C7 (Modified data. Copy the data built in 99 Fixed data-2
C8 the same model.) 9A to A7 Fixed data-1
C9 to CB Fixed data-1 A8 Fixed data-2
CC Fixed data-2 A9 to FF Fixed data-1
CD to D0 Fixed data-1 Table. 5-1-4.
D1 Fixed data-2
D2 to D5 Fixed data-1
D6 Fixed data-2
D7
D8 to D9 Fixed data-1
DA Fixed data-2
DB (Modified data. Copy the data built in
DC the same model.)
DD
DE to DF Fixed data-1
E0 D0 D0 Touch panel adj.
E1 26 26
E2 CE CE
E3 1E 1E
E4 to FF Fixed data-1
Table. 5-1-3.

5-11
1-2-2. INITIALIZATION OF B PAGE DATA Processing after Completing Modification of B Page data:
(DCR-PC5/PC5E) Order Page Address Data Procedure
Note: When reading the B page data, insert a “Memory Stick” into the
“Memory Stick” slot. 1 2 00 29 Set the data.
Switch setting: 2 2 01 29 Set the data, and press PAUSE
POWER ................................................................. MEMORY button.

1. Initializing the B Page Data 3. B Page Table

Note: If the B page data has been initialized, the following adjustments
need to be performed again. Note: Fixed data-1: Initialized data. (Refer to “1. Initializing the B Page
1) Modification of B page data Data”.)
Fixed data-2: Modified data. (Refer to “2. Modification of B Page
Adjusting page B Data”.)

Adjusting Address 00 to FF Address Remark

Initializing Method: 00 to 13 Fixed data-1

Order Page Address Data Procedure 14 Fixed data-2
1 0 01 01 Set the data. 15 (Modified data. Copy the data built in the same
2 2 8F 02 Set the data, and press PAUSE 16 model.)
button. 17
3 2 8F 03 Set the data, and press PAUSE 18
button. 19
4 2 8F 02 Set the data, and press PAUSE 1A to 4F Fixed data-1
button. 50 Fixed data-2
5 2 8F 00 Set the data, and press PAUSE 51 to 53 Fixed data-1
button. 54 Fixed data-2
6 5 0E 00 Set the data, and press PAUSE 55 to 6F Fixed data-1
button. 70 Fixed data-2
7 5 01 F3 Set the data, and press PAUSE 71 to FF Fixed data-1
button.
Table. 5-1-5.
8 5 00 01 Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
9 5 0E Check that the data changes to
“01”.
10 Perform “Modification of B
Page Data”.

2. Modification of B Page Data

If the B page data has been initialized, change the data of the “Fixed
data-2” address shown in the following tables by manual input.

Preparations:
Order Page Address Data Procedure
1 2 8F 02 Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
2 2 8F 03 Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
3 2 8F 02 Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
4 2 8F 00 Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.

Modifying Method:
1) Before changing the data, select page: 0, address: 01, and set
data: 01.
2) New data for changing are not shown in the tables because
they are different in destination. When changing the data, copy
the data built in the same model.
Note: If copy the data built in the different model, the camcorder may
not operate.
3) When changing the data, press the PAUSE button of the
adjustment remote commander each time when setting new
data to write the data in the non-volatile memory.

5-12
1-2-3. INITIALIZATION OF E, F, 7 PAGE DATA 3. F Page Table

1. Initializing the E, F, 7 Page Data Note1: Fixed data-1: Initialized data. (Refer to “1. Initializing the E, F, 7
Page Data”.)
Note1: If “Initializing the E, F, 7 Page Data” is performed, all data of the Fixed data-2: Modified data. (Refer to “2. Modification of E, F, 7
E page, F page and 7 page will be initialized. (It is impossible to Page Data”.)
initialize a single page.)
Note2: If the E, F, 7 page data has been initialized, following adjustments
need to be performed again. Address Initial value Remark
1) Modification of E, F, 7 page data NTSC PAL
2) Camera system adjustments 00 to 0F
3) IR transmitter adjustments
10 to 11 Fixed data-1
12 80 80 36MHz origin osc adj.
Adjusting page F
13 80 80 Zoom key center adj.
Adjusting Address 10 to FF
14 to 16 Fixed data-1
Adjusting page E 17 81 81 HALL adj.
Adjusting Address 00 to FF 18 A0 A0
Adjusting page 7 19 17 17
Adjusting Address 00 to 59 1A to 1C Fixed data-1
1D 9A 9A Max gain adj.
Switch setting:
1E 80 80 AWB & LV standard data input
POWER .................................................................. CAMERA
1F 7A 7A
Initializing Method: 20 to 30 Fixed data-1
Order Page Address Data Procedure 30 90 90 AWB & LV standard data input
1 0 01 01 Set the data. 31 3E 3E
2 6 01 Set the following data, and press 32 43 43
PAUSE button. 33 59 59
2D: DCR-PC5 (NTSC) 34 Fixed data-1
2F: DCR-PC4E/PC5E (PAL) 35 22 22 Color reproduction adj.
3 6 03 01 Set the data, and press PAUSE 36 Fixed data-1
button. 37 27 24 Color reproduction adj.
4 6 02 Check that the data changes to 38 to 3B Fixed data-1
“01”. 3C 00 00 Color reproduction adj.
5 Perform “Modification of E, F, 7 3D F1 EF
Page Data”. 3E to 3F Fixed data-1
40 80 80 Auto white balance adj.
2. Modification of E, F, 7 Page Data
If the E, F, 7 page data has been initialized, change the data of the 41 40 40
“Fixed data-2” address shown in the following table by manual input. 42 to 49 Fixed data-1
4A 51 51 Flange back adj.
Modifying Method: 4B 19 19
1) Before changing the data, select page: 0, address: 01, and set 4C 22 22
data: 01.
4D 20 20
2) New data for changing are not shown in the tables because
they are different in destination. When changing the data, copy 4E 93 93
the data built in the same model. 4F 13 13
Note: If copy the data built in the different model, the camcorder may 50 00 00
not operate.
51 00 00
3) When changing the data, press the PAUSE button of the
adjustment remote commander each time when setting new 52 to 59 Fixed data-1
data to write the data in the non-volatile memory. 5A 46 46 Flange back adj.
4) Check that the data of adjustment addresses is the initial value. 5B 00 00
If not, change the data to the initial value. 5C 19 19
5D 00 00
Processing after Completing Modification of E, F, 7 Page data
5E 2A 2A
1) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 00.
2) Turn off the power and turn on again. 5F 00 00
60 to 65 Fixed data-1
66 Fixed data-2
67
68 Fixed data-1
69 00 00 Optical axis adj.
6A to 6F Fixed data-1
70 C4 C4 Mechanical shutter adj.

5-13
 4. E Page Table
Address Initial value Remark
Note1: Fixed data-1: Initialized data. (Refer to “1. Initializing the E, F, 7
NTSC PAL Page Data”.)
71 0E 0E Mechanical shutter adj. Fixed data-2: Modified data. (Refer to “2. Modification of E, F, 7
72 75 75 Page Data”.)
73 0C 0C
74 26 26 Address Initial value Remark
75 0B 0B NTSC PAL
76 35 35 00 to 64 Fixed data-1
77 0A 0A 65 Fixed data-2
78 6E 6E 66 to 69 Fixed data-1
79 09 09 6A Fixed data-2
7A A5 A5 6B to 71 Fixed data-1
7B 61 61 72 Fixed data-2
7C A1 A1 73
7D 79 79 74 to 7E Fixed data-1
7E 64 64 7F Fixed data-2
7F 81 81 80 to 83 Fixed data-1
80 82 82 84 Fixed data-2
81 84 84 85
82 B5 B5 86
83 7B 7B 87
84 20 20 88 to 8B Fixed data-1
85 to 8D Fixed data-1 8C Fixed data-2
8E Fixed data-2 8D to 8E Fixed data-1
8F 8F Fixed data-2
90 to 9E Fixed data-1 90
9F Fixed data-2 91
A0 to AF Fixed data-1 92 to 94 Fixed data-1
B0 Fixed data-2 95 Fixed data-2
B1 96 to 97 Fixed data-1
B2 to B3 Fixed data-1 98 Fixed data-2
B4 Fixed data-2 99 to AF Fixed data-1
B5 to D0 Fixed data-1 B0 Fixed data-2
D1 Fixed data-2 B1 (Modified data. Copy the data built in
D2 to D4 Fixed data-1 B2 the same model.)
D5 Fixed data-2 B3
D6 to DC Fixed data-1 B4
DD Fixed data-2 B5
DE to FF Fixed data-1 B6
B7
Table. 5-1-6.
B8 to CE Fixed data-1
CF Fixed data-2
D0 26 24 Optical axis adj.
D1 to DD Fixed data-1
DE 5F 71 Optical axis adj.
DF to FF Fixed data-1
Table. 5-1-7.

5-14
5. 7 Page Table

Note1: Fixed data-1: Initialized data. (Refer to “1. Initializing the E, F, 7

Page Data”.)
Fixed data-2: Modified data. (Refer to “2. Modification of E, F, 7
Page Data”.)

Address Initial value Remark

NTSC PAL
00 to 1B Fixed data-1
1C Fixed data-2
1D (Modified data. Copy the data built in
1E the same model.)
1F
20
21 to 22 Fixed data-1
(Initialized data)
23 7C 7C Mechanical shutter adj.
24 7F 7F
25 7C 7C
26 7B 7B
27 to 3C Fixed data-1
3D Fixed data-2
3E to 51 Fixed data-1
52 Fixed data-2
53
54 to 59 Fixed data-1
Table. 5-1-8.

5-15
1-3. CAMERA SYSTEM ADJUSTMENTS
Before perform the camera system adjustments, check that the
specified values of “VIDEO SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT” are
satisfied.

Note: NTSC model: DCR-PC5

PAL model: DCR-PC4E/PC5E

1. 36MHz Origin Oscillation Adjustment 2. Zoom Key Center Adjustment

(VC-245 board)
Set the frequency of the clock for synchronization. Set the A/D value center of the microprocessor to the center voltage
If deviated, the synchronization will be disrupted and the color will of the zoom key.
become inconsistent. If deviated, the zoom lens operates of itself ,even if the zoom key is
Subject Not required the center position.
Measurement Point Pin qs of IC702 Subject Not required
Measuring Instrument Frequency counter Measurement Point Display data of page: 6, address: 50
Adjustment Page F Measuring Instrument Adjustment remote commander
Adjustment Address 12 Adjustment Page F
Specified Value Pin qs of IC702: Adjustment Address 13
f=18000000 ± 90Hz
Note: Don’t touch the zoom lever during adjustment.
Adjusting method:
Adjusting method:
Order Page Address Data Procedure
Order Page Address Data Procedure
1 0 01 01 Set the data.
1 0 01 01 Set the data.
2 F 12 Change the data and set the
frequency (f) to the specified 2 6 50 Read the data, and this data is
value. named D50.
3 F 12 Press PAUSE button. 3 F 13 D50 Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
4 0 01 00 Set the data.
4 0 01 00 Set the data.

24 13
25 12

36 1
37 48
IC702

VC-245 board (SIDE B)

Fig. 5-1-6.

5-16
3. HALL Adjustment

For detecting the position of the lens iris, adjust AMP gain and
offset.
Subject Not required
Measurement Point Display data of page 1 (Note1)
Measuring Instrument Adjustment remote commander
Adjustment Page F
Adjustment Address 17, 18, 19
Specified Value 1 15 to 19
Specified Value 2 88 to 8C

Note1: Displayed data of page 1 of the adjustment remote commander.

1 : XX : XX
IRIS display data

Switch setting:
POWER .................................................................. CAMERA

Adjusting method:
Order Page Address Data Procedure
1 0 01 01 Set the data.
2 6 94 17 Set the data.
3 6 95 8A Set the data.
4 6 01 6D Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
5 6 02 Check that the data changes to
“01”. (Note2)
6 6 01 00 Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.

Note2: The adjustment data will be automatically input to page: F, address:

17, 18, 19.

Checking method:
Order Page Address Data Procedure
1 6 04 03 Set the data.
2 6 01 01 Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
3 1 Check that the IRIS display data
(Note1) satisfies the specified
value 1.
4 6 01 03 Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
5 1 Check that the IRIS display data
(Note1) satisfies the specified
value.2.

Processing after Completing Adjustments:

Order Page Address Data Procedure
1 6 94 00 Set the data.
2 6 95 00 Set the data.
3 6 01 00 Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
4 6 04 00 Set the data.
5 0 01 00 Set the data.

5-17
4. Flange Back Adjustment
(Using Minipattern Box)
The inner focus lens flange back adjustment is carried out
automatically. In whichever case, the focus will be deviated during
auto focusing/manual focusing.
Subject Siemens star chart with ND filter for
the minipattern box (Note1)
Measurement Point Display data of page: F, address: 5F
Measuring Instrument Adjustment remote commander
Adjustment Page F
Adjustment Address 13, 4A to 51, 5A to 5F
Specified Value Upper digit: 0 to B
Lower digit: 0 to 9

Note1: Dark Siemens star chart.

Note2: Check that the data of page: 6, address: 02 is “00”. If not, to page:
6, address: 01, set data: 00, and press the PAUSE button.

Switch setting:
1) POWER .................................................................. CAMERA
2) NIGHT SHOT .................................................................. OFF

Preparations: Adjusting method:

1) The minipattern box is installed as shown in the following Order Page Address Data Procedure
figure.
Note: The attachment lenses are not used. 1 0 01 01 Set the data.
2) Install the minipattern box so that the distance between it and 2 6 01 13 Set the data, and press PAUSE
the front of the lens of the camcorder is less than 3cm. button. (Note3)
3) Make the height of the minipattern box and the camcorder equal. 3 6 01 27 Set the data, and press PAUSE
4) Check that the output voltage of the regulated power supply is button.
the specified voltage.
4 6 02 Check that the data changes to
5) Check that at both the zoom lens TELE end and WIDE end,
“01”. (Note4)
the center of the Siemens star chart and center of the exposure
screen coincide. 5 F 5F Check that the upper digit of the
data is “0” to “B”.
Specified voltage: The specified voltage varies according to the 6 F 5F Check that the lower digit of the
minipattern box, so adjust the power supply data is “0” to “9”.
output voltage to the specified voltage written
on the sheet which is supplied with the Note3: Don’t touch the zoom lever. If you touch the zoom lever, the zoom
minipattern box. center adjustment data will be rewritten in the value which isn’t
correct.
Below 3 cm Note4: The adjustment data will be automatically input to page: F, address:
13, 4A to 51, 5A to 5F.
Minipattern box
Processing after Completing Adjustments:
Camcorder Order Page Address Data Procedure
1 6 01 00 Set the data, and press PAUSE
Camera
table button.
2 0 01 00 Set the data.
Regulated power supply
Output voltage : Specified voltage ±0.01Vdc 3 Perform “Flange Back Check”.
Output current : more than 3.5A

Red (+)
Black (–)
Yellow (SENS +)

White (SENS –) Need not connected

Black (GND)

Fig. 5-1-7.

5-18
5. Flange Back Adjustment
(Using Flange Back Adjustment Chart and Subject
More Than 500m Away)
The inner focus lens flange back adjustment is carried out
automatically. In whichever case, the focus will be deviated during
auto focusing/manual focusing.

5-1. Flange Back Adjustment (1) 5-2. Flange Back Adjustment (2)
Subject Flange back adjustment chart Perform this adjustment after performing “Flange Back Adjustment
(2.0 m from the front of the protection (1)”.
glass) Subject Subject more than 500m away
(Luminance: 350 ± 30 lux) (Subjects with clear contrast such as
Measurement Point Display data of page: F, address: 5F buildings, etc.)
Measuring Instrument Adjustment remote commander Measurement Point Check operation on TV monitor
Adjustment Page F Measuring Instrument
Adjustment Address 13, 4A to 51, 5A to 5F Adjustment Page F
Specified Value Upper digit: 0 to B Adjustment Address 13, 4A to 51, 5A to 5F
Lower digit: 0 to 9
Note1: Check that the data of page: 6, address: 02 is “00”. If not, to page:
Note1: Check that the data of page: 6, address: 02 is “00”. If not, to page: 6, address: 01, set data: 00, and press the PAUSE button.
6, address: 01, set data: 00, and press the PAUSE button.
Switch setting:
Switch setting: 1) POWER .................................................................. CAMERA
1) POWER .................................................................. CAMERA 2) NIGHT SHOT .................................................................. OFF
2) NIGHT SHOT .................................................................. OFF
Preparations:
Adjusting method: 1) Set the zoom lens to the TELE end and expose a subject that is
more than 500m away (subject with clear contrast such as
Order Page Address Data Procedure
building, etc.). (Nearby subjects less than 500m away should
1 0 01 01 Set the data. not be in the screen.)
2 6 01 13 Set the data, and press PAUSE
button. (Note2) Adjusting method:
3 6 01 15 Set the data, and press PAUSE Order Page Address Data Procedure
button. 1 0 01 01 Set the data.
4 6 02 Check that the data changes to 2 6 01 13 Set the data, and press PAUSE
“01”. (Note3) button. (Note2)
5 F 5F Check that the upper digit is “0” Place a ND filter on the lens so
to “B”. that the optimum image is
6 F 5F Check that the lower digit is “0” obtain.
to “9”. 3 6 01 29 Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
Note2: Don’t touch the zoom lever. If you touch the zoom lever, the zoom
center adjustment data will be rewritten in the value which isn’t 4 6 02 Check that the data changes to
correct. “01”. (Note3)
Note3: The adjustment data will be automatically input to page: F, address:
13, 4A to 51, 5A to 5F. Note2: Don’t touch the zoom lever. If you touch the zoom lever, the zoom
center adjustment data will be rewritten in the value which isn’t
Processing after Completing Adjustments: correct.
Note3: The adjustment data will be automatically input to page: F, address:
Order Page Address Data Procedure 13, 4A to 51, 5A to 5F.
1 6 01 00 Set the data, and press PAUSE
button. Processing after Completing Adjustments:
2 Perform “Flange Back Order Page Address Data Procedure
Adjustment (2)” 1 6 01 00 Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
2 0 01 00 Set the data.
3 Perform “Flange Back Check”.

5-19
6. Flange Back Check
Subject Siemens star
(2.0m from the front of the lens)
(Luminance : approx. 200 lux)
Measurement Point Check operation on TV monitor
Measuring Instrument
Specified Value Focused at the TELE end and WIDE
end.

Switch setting:
1) POWER .................................................................. CAMERA
2) NIGHT SHOT .................................................................. OFF
3) DIGITAL ZOOM (Menu display) ................................... OFF
4) STEADY SHOT (Menu display) ..................................... OFF

Note: When the auto focus is ON, the lens can be checked if it is focused
or not by observing the data on the page 1 of the adjustment remote
commander.
1) Select page: 6, address: 04, and set data: 0F.
2) Page 1 shows the state of the focus.
1 : 00 : XX
[ Odd: Focused
Even: Unfocused

Checking method:
1) Place the Siemens star 2.0m from the front of the lens.
2) To open the IRIS, decrease the luminous intensity to the
Siemens star up to a point before noise appear on the image.
3) Shoot the Siemens star with the zoom TELE end.
4) Turn on the auto focus.
5) Check that the lens is focused (Note).
6) Select page: 6, address: 21, and set data: 10.
7) Shoot the Siemens star with the zoom WIDE end.
8) Observe the TV monitor and check that the lens is focused.

Processing after Completing Adjustments:

1) Select page: 6, address: 21, and set data: 00.
2) Select page: 6, address: 04, and set data: 00.

5-20
7. Optical Axis Adjustment
Align the lens Optical Axis with that of the CCD imager. If deviated, Note: NTSC model: DCR-PC5
center of picture can lose focus when zoom is operated from the PAL model: DCR-PC4E/PC5E
WIDE end to the TELE end. Connection data
Subject Siemens star Display Page: F Page: E
Area
Measurement Point Check on the monitor TV phase Address: 69 Address: D0 Address: DE
Measuring Instrument NTSC PAL NTSC PAL
Adjustment Page F E 1 22.6° to 01 22 26 57 69
Adjustment Address 69 D0, DE 67.5°
2 67.6° to 02 22 26 5F 71
Switch setting: 112.5°
1) POWER .................................................................. CAMERA 3 112.6° to 03 22 26 67 79
157.5°
Preparations before adjustments: 4 157.6° to 04 02 26 69 7D
1) Playback the monoscope segment of the system check tape 202.5°
(XH5-5 (NTSC), XH5-5P (PAL)).
5 202.6° to 05 22 26 67 79
2) Attach the optical axis frame chart (transparent) on the monitor
247.5°
TV screen. Center of monoscope image and that that of optical
axis frame must be agree. 6 247.6° to 06 22 26 5F 71
3) Set to the camera mode. 292.5°
7 292.6° to 07 22 26 57 69
Adjusting method: 337.5°
1) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 01. 8 337.6° to 08 02 26 55 65
2) Select page: 6, address: 40, and set data: 02. 22.5°
3) Select page: 6, address: 41, and set data: 01.
Table. 5-1-10.
4) Input the data of Table 5-1-9 to each adjustment addresses.
Note: Press the PAUSE button each time to set the data.
Processing after Completing Adjustments:
Page: F Page: E
1) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 00.
Address: 69 Address: D0 Address: DE 2) Select page: 6, address: 40, and set data: 00.
NTSC PAL NTSC PAL 3) Select page: 6, address: 41, and set data: 00.
00 22 26 5F 71
Table. 5-1-9.

5) Place the Siemens star 2.0 m away from the front of the lens.
6) Shoot the Siemens star with the zoom TELE end.
7) Point the lens toward the Siemens star chart until center of the
Siemens star is located in the center of the optical axis frame.
8) Shoot the Siemens star with the zoom WIDE end.
9) Measure on the monitor TV screen in which area of the optical
axis frame the center of the Siemens star is located. Measure
the amount of displacement (distance between the center of
the Siemens star and the center of the optical axis frame.) The
measurement value is named L1.
10) Read the correction data corresponding to the area from Table
5-1-10.
11) Input the correction data to each adjustment address.
Note: Press the PAUSE button each time to set the data.
12) Shoot the Siemens star with the zoom TELE end.
13) Point the lens toward the Siemens star chart until center of the
Siemens star is located in the center of the optical axis frame.
14) Shoot the Siemens star with the zoom WIDE end.
Fig. 5-1-8.
15) Measure the amount of displacement (distance between the
center of the Siemens star and the center of the optical axis
frame.) The measurement value is named L2.
16) Compare the values L1 and L2, and confirm that L2 is smaller
than L1. If L2 is lager than L1, input the data of Table 5-1-9 to
each adjustment address.
Note: Press the PAUSE button each time to set the data.

5-21
8. Picture Frame Setting
Subject Color bar chart
(Color reproduction adjustment
frame)
(1.5m from the front of the lens)
Measurement Point Video output terminal
Measuring Instrument Oscilloscope and TV monitor
Specified Value A=B, C=D, E=F

Switch setting:
1) POWER .................................................................. CAMERA
2) NIGHT SHOT .................................................................. OFF
3) DIGITAL ZOOM (Menu display) ................................... OFF
4) STEADY SHOT (Menu display) ..................................... OFF

Setting method:
1) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 01.
2) Select page: F, address: 69, after noting down the data, set data: Check on the oscilloscope
00, and press the PAUSE button.
3) Adjust the zoom and the camera direction, and set to the 1. Horizontal period
specified position. A=B C=D
4) Mark the position of the picture frame on the monitor display,
and adjust the picture frame to this position in following B C
adjustments using “Color reproduction adjustment frame”. A D

Processing after Completing Camera System Adjustments:

After completing the camera system adjustments, release the data
settings.
1) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 01.
2) Select page: F, address: 69, set the data noted down at step 2),
and press the PAUSE button.
3) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 00.

Fig. 5-1-9.

2. Vertical period
E E=F F

V
Fig. 5-1-10.

Check on the monitor TV (Underscanned mode)

Color bar chart picture frame Monitor TV picture frame

Fig. 5-1-11.

5-22
9. Color Reproduction Adjustment
Adjust the color Separation matrix coefficient so that proper color
reproduction is produced.
Subject Color bar chart
(Color reproduction adjustment
frame)
Measurement Point Video output terminal
Measuring Instrument Vectorscope
Adjustment Page F
Adjustment Address 35, 37, 3C, 3D
Specified Value All color luminance points should
settle within each color reproduction
frame.

Note: NTSC model: DCR-PC5 For NTSC model

PAL model: DCR-PC4E/PC5E

Switch setting:
1) POWER .................................................................. CAMERA
2) NIGHT SHOT .................................................................. OFF
3) DIGITAL ZOOM (Menu display) ................................... OFF
4) STEADY SHOT (Menu display) ..................................... OFF

Adjusting method:
1) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 01.
2) Select page: F, address: 8E, set data: 29, and press the PAUSE
button.
3) Select page: F, address: C0, set the following data and press
the PAUSE button.
37: NTSC model Burst position
B7: PAL model
4) Select page: 6, address: 01, set data: 3D, and press the PAUSE
button.
5) Adjust the GAIN and PHASE of the vectorscope, and adjust For PAL model
the burst luminance point to the burst position of the color
reproduction frame. Burst position
6) Change the data of page: F, address: 35, 37, 3C and 3D, and
settle each color luminance point in each color reproduction
frame.
Note: Be sure to press the PAUSE button of the adjustment remote
commander before changing the addresses. If not, the new data
will not be written to the memory.

Processing after Completing Adjustments:

1) Select page: F, address: 8E, set data: 2E, and press the PAUSE
button.
2) Select page: 6, address: 01, set data: 00, and press the PAUSE
button.
3) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 00.

Fig. 5-1-12.

5-23
10. MAX GAIN Adjustment 11. Auto White Balance & LV Standard Data Input
Setting the minimum illumination. Adjust the white balance reference at 3200K, and adjust the normal
If it is not consistent, the image level required for taking subjects in coefficient of the light value.
low illuminance will not be produced (dark). Subject Clear chart
Subject Clear chart (Color reproduction adjustment
(Color reproduction adjustment frame)
frame) Measurement Point Display data of page 1 (Note4)
Adjustment Page F Measuring Instrument Adjustment remote commander
Adjustment Address 1D Adjustment Page F
Adjustment Address 1E, 1F, 30 to 33
Switch setting:
1) POWER .................................................................. CAMERA Specified Value 0FF0 to 1010
2) NIGHT SHOT .................................................................. OFF
3) STEADY SHOT (Menu display) ..................................... OFF Note1: This adjustment should be carried out upon completion of “ Color
reproduction Adjustment”.
Note2: After the power is turned on, this adjustment can be done only
Adjusting method: once.
Order Page Address Data Procedure Note3: Check that the data of page: 6, address: 02 is “00”. If not, to page:
6, address: 01, set data: 00, and press the PAUSE button.
1 0 01 01 Set the data.
Note4: Displayed data of page 1 of the adjustment remote commander.
2 6 96 00 Set the data. 1 : XX : XX
3 6 97 27 Set the data. LV data
4 6 01 6F Set the data, and press PAUSE
Switch setting:
button.
1) POWER .................................................................. CAMERA
5 6 02 Check that the data changes to 2) NIGHT SHOT .................................................................. OFF
“01”. (Note)
Adjusting method:
Note: The adjustment data will be automatically input to page: F, address:
1D Order Page Address Data Procedure
1 0 01 01 Set the data.
Processing after Completing Adjustments 2 6 01 11 Set the data, and press PAUSE
Order Page Address Data Procedure button.
1 6 96 00 Set the data. 3 6 01 0D Set the data, and press PAUSE
2 6 97 00 Set the data. button.
3 6 01 00 Set the data, and press PAUSE 4 6 02 Check that the data changes to
button. “01”. (Note5)
4 0 01 00 Set the data. 5 F 10 2E Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
6 1 Check that the display data
(Note4) satisfies the specified
value.

Note5: The adjustment data will be automatically input to page: F, address:

1E, 1F, 30 to 33.

Processing after Completing Adjustments

Order Page Address Data Procedure
1 6 01 00 Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
2 F 10 00 Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
3 0 01 00 Set the data.
4 Perform “Auto White Balance
Adjustment”.

5-24
12. Auto White Balance Adjustment Adjusting method:
Adjust to the proper auto white balance output data. Order Page Address Data Procedure
If it is not correct, auto white balance and color reproducibility will
1 Place the C14 filter for color
be poor.
temperature correction on the
Subject Clear chart lens.
(Color reproduction adjustment
2 0 01 01 Set the data.
frame)
3 F 42 Write down the data.
Filter Filter C14 for color temperature
correction 4 F 42 Set the following data, and press
PAUSE button.
Measurement Point Display data of page 1 (Note3)
2B: DCR-PC5 (NTSC)
Measuring Instrument Adjustment remote commander 2D: DCR-PC4E/PC5E (PAL)
Adjustment Page F 5 F 43 Write down the data.
Adjustment Address 40, 41 6 F 43 80 Set the data, and press PAUSE
Specified Value DCR-PC5(NTSC): button.
R ratio: 2B00 to 2C00 7 F 44 Write down the data.
B ratio: 5B00 to 5C00
8 F 44 5B Set the data, and press PAUSE
DCR-PC4E/PC5E (PAL):
button.
R ratio: 2D00 to 2E00
B ratio: 5B00 to 5C00 9 F 45 Write down the data.
10 F 45 80 Set the data, and press PAUSE
Note1: After the power is turned on, this adjustment can be done only button.
once.
11 6 01 83 Set the data, and press PAUSE
Note2: Perform “Auto White Balance & LV Standard Data Input” before
this adjustment. button.
Note3: Displayed data of page 1 of the adjustment remote commander. 12 6 01 81 Set the data, and press PAUSE
1 : XX : XX button.
Display data
13 6 02 Check that the data changes to
“01”. (Note4)
Switch setting:
1) POWER .................................................................. CAMERA 14 6 01 3F Set the data, and press PAUSE
2) NIGHT SHOT .................................................................. OFF button.
3) DIGITAL ZOOM (Menu display) ................................... OFF 15 6 04 04 Set the data.
16 1 Check that the display data
(Note3) satisfies the R ratio
specified value.
17 6 04 05 Set the data.
18 1 Check that the display data
(Note3) satisfies the B ratio
specified value.

Note4: The adjustment data will be automatically input to page: F, address:

40, 41.

Processing after Completing Adjustments:

Order Page Address Data Procedure
1 6 01 00 Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
2 6 04 00 Set the data.
3 F 42 Set the data that is written down
at step 3, and press PAUSE
button.
4 F 43 Set the data that is written down
at step 5, and press PAUSE
button.
5 F 44 Set the data that is written down
at step 7, and press PAUSE
button.
6 F 45 Set the data that is written down
at step 9, and press PAUSE
button.
7 0 01 00 Set the data.

5-25
13. White Balance Check Processing after Completing Adjustments
Subject Clear chart Order Page Address Data Procedure
(Color reproduction adjustment 1 6 01 00 Set the data, and press PAUSE
frame) button.
Filter Filter C14 for color temperature 2 F 10 00 Set the data, and press PAUSE
correction button.
ND filter 1.0 and 0.4 and 0.1
3 0 01 00 Set the data.
Measurement Point Video output terminal
Measuring Instrument Vectorscope
Specified Value Fig. 5-1-13. A to B

Switch setting:
1) POWER .................................................................. CAMERA
2) NIGHT SHOT .................................................................. OFF
3) DIGITAL ZOOM (Menu display) ................................... OFF

Checking method:
Order Page Address Data Procedure
Indoor white balance check
1 Check that the lens is not
covered with either filter.
2 6 01 0F Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
3 Check that the center of the
white luminance point is within
the circle shown Fig. 5-1-13. A.
Outdoor white balance check
R-Y 2mm
4 6 01 3F Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
5 Place the C14 filter on the lens. B-Y
6 Check that the center of the
white luminance point is within
the circle shown Fig. 5-1-13. B. 2mm
7 Remove the C14 filter.
Fig. 5-1-13. (A)
Indoor white balance data check
8 6 01 00 Set the data, and press PAUSE R-Y
0.5mm
button.
9 Place the ND filter 1.5 B-Y
(1.0+0.1+0.4) on the lens. 0.5mm
3mm
10 0 01 01 Set the data.
11 F 10 A9 Set the data, and press PAUSE
button. 3mm
12 1 Check that the display data
(Note) satisfies the specified Fig. 5-1-13. (B)
value.
Specified value: 0000 to 0BC0
13 F 10 A1 Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
14 1 Check that the second digit of
the display data (Note) is an odd
number.
Specified value:
1 : XX : XX
Odd number

Note: Displayed data of the adjustment remote commander.

1 : XX : XX
Display data

5-26
14. Mechanical Shutter Adjustment 15. Steady Shot Check
(DCR-PC5/PC5E)
Adjust the period which the mechanical shutter is closed, and Precautions on the Parts Replacement
compensate the exposure. There are two types of repair parts.
Type A: ENC03LA
Adjustment Page F 7
Type B: ENC03LB
Adjustment Address 70 to 84 23 to 26 Replace the broken sensor with a same type sensor. If replace with
other type parts, the image will vibrate up and down or left and
Input method: right during hand-shake correction operations. After replacing,
1) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 01. perform the following procedure.
2) Input the following data to page: F, addresses: 70 to 84.
Note: Press the PAUSE button of the adjustment remote commander Precautions on Angular Velocity Sensor
each time to set the data. The sensor incorporates a precision oscillator. Handle it with care
Address Data as if it dropped, the balance of the oscillator will be disrupted and
70 C4 operations will not be performed properly.
71 0E Subject Arbitrary
72 75 Measurement Point Display data of page 1 (Note1)
73 0C Measuring Instrument Adjustment remote commander
74 26 Specified Value 1A00 to 2600
75 0B
Note1: Displayed data of the adjustment remote commander.
76 35 1 : XX : XX
77 0A Display data
78 6E
Switch setting:
79 09 1) STEADY SHOT (Menu display) ...................................... ON
7A A5 2) ZOOM .................................................................... TELE end
7B 61
Check method:
7C A1
Order Page Address Data Procedure
7D 79
7E 64 Pitch sensor check
(CF-75 board SE3450)
7F 81
1 6 04 11 Set the data.
80 82
81 84 2 1 Check that the display data
(Note1) satisfies the specified
82 B5
value. (Note2)
83 7B
Yaw sensor check
84 20 (CF-75 board SE3451)
3) Input the following data to page: 7, addresses: 23 to 26. 3 6 04 12 Set the data.
Note: Press the PAUSE button of the adjustment remote commander
each time to set the data. 4 1 Check that the display data
(Note1) satisfies the specified
Address Data value. (Note2)
23 7C Steady shot check
24 7F 5 0 01 01 Set the data.
25 7C 6 F 10 E2 Set the data, and press PAUSE
26 7B button.
4) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 00. 7 1 Move the camcoder, and check
that the display data (Note1) is
changing.
8 F 10 E3 Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
9 1 Move the camcoder, and check
that the display data (Note1) is
changing.

Note2: Don’t move the camcoder during data check.

Processing after Completing Adjustments

Order Page Address Data Procedure
1 F 10 00 Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
2 0 01 00 Set the data.
3 6 04 00 Set the data.
4 Move the camcoder, and check
that the steady shot operations
have been performed normally
5-27
1-4. COLOR ELECTRONIC VIEWFINDER 1. VCO Adjustment (VC-245 board)
SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT Set the VCO free-run frequency. If deviated, the EVF screen will be
blurred.
Note1: When replacing the LCD unit, be careful to prevent damages Mode Camera
caused by static electricity.
Subject Arbitrary
Note2: Set the switches as follows.
Viewfinder ................................... ON (Viewfinder is Pulled out.) Measurement Point Pin 5 of CN004 (EVF VCO)
Note3: Perform the following data setting before the viewfinder system Measuring Instrument Frequency counter
adjustments.
1) Select page: 2, address: 0E, and set data: 67. Adjustment Page D
2) Select page: 2, address: 0F, and set data: 01. Adjustment Address 92, 93
Reset the data after completing adjustment.
1) Select page: 2, address: 0E, and set data: 00.
Specified Value f = 15734 ± 30Hz (NTSC)
2) Select page: 2, address: 0F, and set data: 00. f = 15625 ± 30Hz (PAL)

[Adjusting connector] Note1: NTSC: DCR-PC5

PAL: DCR-PC4E/PC5E
Most of the measuring points for adjusting the viewfinder system
are concentrated in CN004 of the VC-245 board.
Adjusting method:
Connect the Measuring Instruments via the CPC-6 flexible jig (J-
6082-370-B) and CPC-6 terminal board jig (J-6082-371-A). Order Page Address Data Procedure
The following table shows the Pin No. and signal name of CN004. 1 0 01 01 Set the data.
Pin No. Signal Name Pin No. Signal Name 2 D 92 Change the data and set the
1 LANC SIG 2 VCO frequency (f) to the
specified value.
3 4 EVF VG
5 EVF VCO 6 GND 3 D 92 Press PAUSE button.
7 8 4 D 92 Read the data, and this data is
named D92.
9 10
11 12 TMS 5 Convert D92 to decimal notation,
and obtain D92'. (Note2)
13 TCK 14 TDI
6 Calculate D93' using following
15 TDO 16 GND
equations (Decimal calculation)
17 SWP 18 RF IN/LANC JACK IN NTSC model:
19 GND 20 RF MON When D92' 226
Table 5-1-11. D93' = D92' + 29
When D92' > 226
D93' = 255
PAL model:
CN004 When D92' 29
2 1 D93' = D92' – 29
When D92' < 29
20 19 D93' = 00
7 Convert D93' to a hexadecimal
number, and obtain D93. (Note2)
8 D 93 D93 Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
9 0 01 00 Set the data.

Note2: Refer to “Table 5-4-1. Hexadecimal-decimal Conversion Table”.

Remove the CPC lid

Screw (M1.7 × 2.5)

Fig. 5-1-14.

5-28
2. Bright Adjustment (VC-245 board) 3. Contrast Adjustment (VC-245 board)
Set the D range of the RGB decoder used to drive the LCD to the Set the level of the VIDEO signal for driving the LCD to the specified
specified value. If deviated, the LCD screen will become blackish value. If deviated, the screen image will be blackish or saturated
or saturated (whitish). (whitish).
Mode Camera Mode Camera
Subject Arbitrary Subject Arbitrary
Measurement Point Pin 4 of CN004 (EVF VG) Measurement Point Pin 4 of CN004 (EVF VG)
Measuring Instrument Oscilloscope Measuring Instrument Oscilloscope
Adjustment Page D Adjustment Page D
Adjustment Address 95 Adjustment Address 99
Specified Value A = 7.60 ± 0.05V Specified Value A=2.45 ± 0.05V

Adjusting method: Adjusting method:

Order Page Address Data Procedure Order Page Address Data Procedure
1 0 01 01 Set the data. 1 0 01 01 Set the data.
2 D 95 Change the data and set the 2 D 99 Change the data and set the
voltage (A) between the reversed voltage (A) between the 3 steps
waveform pedestal and non- peak and pedestal to the
reversed waveform pedestal to specified value.
the specified value. (The data should be “00” to “7F”.)
3 D 95 Press PAUSE button. 3 D 99 Press PAUSE button.
4 0 01 00 Set the data. 4 0 01 00 Set the data.

Pedestal

A
3 steps peak

2H 2H
Pedestal Pedestal

Fig. 5-1-15. Fig. 5-1-16.

5-29
4. White Balance Adjustment (VC-245 board)
Correct the white balance.
If deviated, the reproduction of the EVF screen may degenerate.
Mode Camera
Subject Arbitrary
Measurement Point Check on EVF screen
Measuring Instrument
Adjustment Page D
Adjustment Address 97, 98
Specified Value The EVF screen should not be
colored.

Note1: Check the white balance only when replacing the following parts.
If necessary, adjust them.
1. LCD panel
2. Light induction plate
3. IC1802
Note2: Use the AC power adaptor.

Adjusting method:
Order Page Address Data Procedure
1 0 01 01 Set the data.
2 D 97 80 Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
3 D 98 80 Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
4 D 98 Check that the EVF screen is not
colored. If not colored, proceed
to step 10.
5 D 97 Change the data so that the EVF
screen is not colored.
6 D 97 Press PAUSE button.
7 D 98 Change the data so that the EVF
screen is not colored.
8 D 98 Press PAUSE button.
9 D 98 If the EVF screen is colored,
repeat steps 5 to 9.
10 0 01 00 Set the data.

5-30
1-5. LCD SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT 1. VCO Adjustment (PD-126 board)
Set the VCO free-run frequency. If deviated, the LCD screen will
Note 1: The back light (fluorescent tube) is driven by a high voltage AC be blurred.
power supply. Therefore, do not touch the back light holder to Mode VTR stop
avoid electrical shock.
Note 2: When replacing the LCD unit, be careful to prevent damages Signal No signal
caused by static electricity. Measurement Point Pin 5 of CN2105 (HSY)
Measuring Instrument Frequency counter
[Adjusting connector]
Most of the measuring points for adjusting the LCD system are Adjustment Page D
concentrated in CN2105 of the PD-126 board. The following table Adjustment Address A2, A3
shows the Pin No. and signal name of CN2105. Specified Value f = 15734 ± 30Hz (NTSC)
Pin No. Signal Name f = 15625 ± 30Hz (PAL)
1 VG
Note1: NTSC: DCR-PC5
2 COM PAL: DCR-PC4E/PC5E
3 GND
4 PSIG Adjusting method:
5 HSY Order Page Address Data Procedure
Table 5-1-12. 1 0 01 01 Set the data.
2 D A2 Change the data and set the
VCO frequency (f) to the
specified value.
CN2105 3 D A2 Press PAUSE button.
5 1 4 D A2 Read the data, and this data is
named DA2.
5 Convert DA2 to decimal notation,
and obtain DA2'. (Note2)
PD-126 board 6 Calculate DA3' using following
equations (Decimal calculation)
NTSC model:
When DA2' 221
DA3' = DA2' + 34
When DA2' > 221
DA3' = 255
PAL model:
When DA2' 34
DA3' = DA2' – 34
Fig. 5-1-17. When DA2' < 34
DA3' = 00
7 Convert DA3' to a hexadecimal
number, and obtain DA3. (Note2)
8 D A3 DA3 Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
9 0 01 00 Set the data.

Note2: Refer to “Table 5-4-1. Hexadecimal-decimal Conversion Table”.

5-31
2. Bright Adjustment (PD-126 board) 3. Black Limit Adjustment (PD-126 board)
Set the D range of the RGB decoder used to drive the LCD to the Set the dynamic range of the LCD driver to an appropriate level. If
specified value. If deviated, the LCD screen will become blackish deviated, the LCD screen will become blackish or saturated
or saturated (whitish). (whitish).
Mode VTR stop Mode VTR stop
Signal No signal Signal No signal
Measurement Point Pin 1 of CN2105 (VG) Measurement Point Pin 4 of CN2105 (PSIG)
Measuring Instrument Oscilloscope Measuring Instrument Oscilloscope
Adjustment Page D Adjustment Page D
Adjustment Address A5 Adjustment Address A6
Specified Value A = 7.8 ± 0.05V Specified Value A = 8.60 ± 0.05V

Adjusting method: Adjusting method:

Order Page Address Data Procedure Order Page Address Data Procedure
1 0 01 01 Set the data. 1 0 01 01 Set the data.
2 D A5 Change the data and set the 2 2 0E 61 Set the data.
voltage (A) between the reversed 3 2 0F Set the following data.
waveform pedestal and non- 5B: DCR-PC5 (NTSC)
reversed waveform pedestal to 53: DCR-PC4E/PC5E (PAL)
the specified value.
4 D A6 Change the data and set the
3 D A5 Press PAUSE button. PSIG signal amplitude (A) to the
4 0 01 00 Set the data. specified value.
5 Perform “Black Limit (The data should be “00” to
Adjustment”. “0F”.)
5 D A6 Press PAUSE button.
6 2 0E 00 Set the data.
Pedestal 7 2 0F 00 Set the data.
8 0 01 00 Set the data.
9 Check that the spacified value of
“Bright Adjustment” is satisfied.
If not, perform “Bright
Adjustment”.

2H V
Pedestal
Fig. 5-1-19.
Fig. 5-1-18.

5-32
4. Contrast Adjustment (PD-126 board) 5. Center Level Adjustment (PD-126 board)
Set the level of the VIDEO signal for driving the LCD to the specified Set the video signal center level of LCD panel to an appropriate
value. If deviated, the screen image will be blackish or saturated level.
(whitish). Mode VTR stop
Mode VTR stop Signal No signal
Signal No signal Measurement Point Pin 1 of CN2105 (VG)
Measurement Point Pin 1 of CN2105 (VG) Measuring Instrument Digital voltmeter
Measuring Instrument Oscilloscope Adjustment Page D
Adjustment Page D Adjustment Address AB
Adjustment Address AA Specified Value A = 7.00 ± 0.05Vdc
Specified Value A = 2.95 ± 0.05V
Adjusting method:
Adjusting method: Order Page Address Data Procedure
Order Page Address Data Procedure 1 0 01 01 Set the data.
1 0 01 01 Set the data. 2 3 0C 60 Set the data, and press PAUSE
2 D AA Change the data and set the button.
voltage (A) between the 3 steps 3 3 22 08 Set the data, and press PAUSE
peak and pedestal to the button.
specified value.
4 D AB Change the data and set the DC
(The data should be “00” to
voltage (A) to the specified
“7F”.)
value.
3 D AA Press PAUSE button. (The data should be “00” to
4 0 01 00 Set the data. “7F”.)
5 Check that the specified value of 5 D AB Press PAUSE button.
“Bright Adjustment” is satisfied. 6 3 0C 00 Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
7 3 22 00 Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
8 0 01 00 Set the data.

3 steps peak

2H
Pedestal
Fig. 5-1-20.

5-33
6. V-COM Adjustment (PD-126 board) 7. White Balance Adjustment (PD-126 board)
Set the DC bias of the common electrode drive signal of LCD to the Correct the white balance.
specified value. If deviated, the reproduction of the LCD screen may degenerate.
If deviated, the LCD display will move, producing flicker and Mode VTR stop
conspicuous vertical lines.
Signal No signal
Mode VTR stop
Measurement Point Check on LCD screen
Signal No signal
Measuring Instrument
Measurement Point Check on LCD display
Adjustment Page D
Measuring Instrument
Adjustment Address A8, A9
Adjustment Page D
Specified Value The LCD screen should not be
Adjustment Address A4 colored.
Specified Value The brightness difference between the
section A and section B is minimum. Note1: Check the white balance only when replacing the following parts.
If necessary, adjust them.
Note: Perform “Bright Adjustment”, “Black Limit Adjustment”, “Contrast 1. LCD panel
Adjustment” and “Center Level Adjustment” before this adjustment. 2. Light induction plate
3. IC2101
Note2: Use the AC power adaptor.
Adjusting method:
Order Page Address Data Procedure Adjusting method:
1 0 01 01 Set the data. Order Page Address Data Procedure
2 D A4 Change the data so that the 1 0 01 01 Set the data.
brightness of the section A and
2 D A8 90 Set the data, and press PAUSE
that of the section B is equal.
button.
(The data should be “80” to
“BF”.) 3 D A9 6F Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
3 D A4 Subtract 3 from the data.
4 D A9 Check that the LCD screen is
4 D A4 Press PAUSE button.
not colored. If not colored,
5 0 01 00 Set the data. proceed to step 10.
5 D A8 Change the data so that the LCD
screen is not colored.
6 D A8 Press PAUSE button.
B A
7 D A9 Change the data so that the LCD
screen is not colored.
A B 8 D A9 Press PAUSE button.
9 D A9 If the LCD screen is colored,
B A repeat steps 5 to 9.
10 0 01 00 Set the data.
A B

Fig. 5-1-21.

5-34
5-2. MECHANISM SECTION
ADJUSTMENT
On the mechanism section adjustment 2-3. TAPE PATH ADJUSTMENT
For details of mechanism section adjustments, checks,
and replacement of mechanism parts, refer to the separate 1. Preparation for Adjustment
volume “DV MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT MANUAL 1) Clean the tape running side (tape guide, drum, capstan shaft,
J Mechanism ”. pinch roller, etc.).
2) Connect the adjustment remote commander to the LANC jack.
2-1. HOW TO ENTER RECORD MODE WITHOUT 3) Turn the HOLD switch of the adjustment remote commander
CASSETTE to the ON position.
4) Connect an oscilloscope to VC-245 board CN004 via the CPC-
1) Connect the adjustment remote commander to the LANC jack. 6 flexible jig (J-6082-370-B) and CPC-6 terminal board jig (J-
2) Turn the HOLD switch of the adjustment remote commander 6082-371-A).
to the ON position. Channel 1: VC-245 board, CN004 Pin w; (Note)
3) Close the cassette compartment without the cassette. External trigger: VC-245 board, CN004 Pin qj
4) Select page: 3, address: 01, set data: 0C, and press the PAUSE Note: Connect a 75 Ω resistor between pins w; of CN004 and ql
button of the adjustment remote commander. (GND).
75 Ω resistor (Parts code: 1-247-804-11)
(The mechanism enters the record mode automatically.)
Note: The function buttons become inoperable.
5) Playback the alignment tape for tracking. (XH2-1)
5) To quit the record mode, select page: 3, address: 01, set data: 6) Select page: 3, address: 33, and set data: 08.
00, and press the PAUSE button of the adjustment remote 7) Select page: 3, address: 26, and set data: 31.
commander. (Whenever you want to quit the record mode, be 8) Check that the oscilloscope RF waveform is normal at the
sure to quit following this procedure.) entrance and exit.
If not normal, adjust according to the separate volume
2-2. HOW TO ENTER PLAYBACK MODE “DV MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT MANUAL
J Mechanism ” .
WITHOUT CASSETTE
CN004 of VC-245 board
1) Connect the adjustment remote commander to the LANC jack.
2) Turn the HOLD switch of the adjustment remote commander Pin No. Signal Name Pin No. Signal Name
to the ON position. 1 LANC SIG 2
3) Close the cassette compartment without the cassette. 3 4 EVF VG
4) Select page: 3, address: 01, set data: 0B, and press the PAUSE 5 EVF VCO 6 GND
button of the adjustment remote commander. 7 8
(The mechanism enters the playback mode automatically.)
Note: The function buttons become inoperable.
9 10
5) To quit the playback mode, select page: 3, address: 01, set data: 11 12 TMS
00, and press the PAUSE button of the adjustment remote 13 TCK 14 TDI
commander. (Whenever you want to quit the playback mode, 15 TDO 16 GND
be sure to quit following this procedure.) 17 SWP 18 RF IN/LANC JACK IN
19 GND 20 RF MON

2. Procedure after operations

1) Connect the adjustment remote commander to the LANC jack
and set the HOLD switch to the ON position.
2) Select page: 3, address: 26, and set data: 00.
3) Select page: 3, address: 33, and set data: 00.

Entrance side Check this section Exit side

(Normal waveform)

CH1

CH2
(Trigger)
3.3msec

Fig. 5-2-1.

5-35
5-3. VIDEO SECTION ADJUSTMENTS

NTSC model : DCR-PC5

PAL model : DCR-PC4E/PC5E

3-1. PREPARATIONS BEFORE ADJUSTMENTS

Use the following measuring instruments for video section

adjustments.

3-1-1. Equipment Required

1) TV monitor
2) Oscilloscope (dual-phenomenon, band above 30 MHz with
delay mode) (Unless specified otherwise, use a 10 : 1 probe.)
3) Frequency counter
4) Pattern generator with video output terminal.
5) Digital voltmeter
6) Audio generator
7) Audio level meter
8) Audio distortion meter
9) Audio attenuator
10) Regulated power supply
11) Alignment tapes
• Tracking standard (XH2-1)
Parts code: 8-967-997-01
• SW/OL standard (XH2-3)
Parts code: 8-967-997-11
• Audio operation check for NTSC (XH5-3)
Parts code: 8-967-997-51
• System operation check for NTSC (XH5-5)
Parts code: 8-967-997-61
• BIST check for NTSC (XH5-6)
Parts code: 8-967-997-71
• Audio operation check for PAL (XH5-3P)
Parts code: 8-967-997-55
• System operation check for PAL (XH5-5P)
Parts code: 8-967-997-66
• BIST check for PAL (XH5-6P)
Parts code: 8-967-997-76
12) Adjustment remote commander (J-6082-053-B)
13) CPC-6 flexible jig (J-6082-370-B) (Note)
14) CPC-6 terminal board jig (J-6082-371-A)

Note: When using the old CPC-6 jig (J-6082-370-A), open the cabinet
(R) assembly.

5-36
3-1-2. Precautions on Adjusting Note 1: Setting the “Forced VTR Power ON” mode (VTR mode)
1) The adjustments of this unit are performed in the VTR mode 1) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 01.
or camera mode. 2) Select page: D, address: 10, set data: 02, and press the PAUSE
button of the adjustment remote commander.
To set to the VTR mode, set the power switch to “VCR” (or
The above procedure will enable the VTR power to be turned on
“PLAYER”) or set the “Forced VTR Power ON mode” using with the cabinet (L) (Control switch block (FK-30350)) removed.
the adjustment remote commander (Note 1). After completing adjustments, be sure to exit the “Forced Power
To set to the Camera mode, set the power switch to “CAMERA” ON mode”.
or set the “Forced Camera Power ON mode” using the
adjustment remote commander (Note 2). Note 2: Setting the “Forced Camera Power ON” mode (Camera mode)
After completing adjustments, be sure to exit the “Forced 1) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 01.
VTR Power ON Mode” or “Forced Camera Power ON Mode”. 2) Select page: D, address: 10, set data: 01, and press the PAUSE
button of the adjustment remote commander.
(Note 3)
The above procedure will enable the camera power to be turned
2) To remove the cabinet (R), disconnect the following connectors. on with the cabinet (L) (Control switch block (FK-30350))
1. VC-245 board CN005 (14P, 0.8mm) removed.
2. VC-245 board CN006 (8P, 0.8mm) After completing adjustments, be sure to exit the “Forced Power
3. VC-245 board CN003 (60P, 0.4mm) ON mode”.
As the Battery terminal, AUDIO/VIDEO jack and LANC jack
are provided on the BJ-1 board of the cabinet (R), the BJ-1 Note 3: Setting the “Forced Memory Power ON” mode (Memory mode)
board must be connected to the VC-245 board. So remove the (DCR-PC5/PC5E)
1) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 01.
BJ-1 board from the cabinet (R). To remove The BJ-1 board
2) Select page: D, address: 10, set data: 05, and press the PAUSE
from the cabinet (R), disconnect the following connector (The button of the adjustment remote commander.
LCD block needs not to be connected.) The above procedure will enable the memory power to be turned
BJ-1 board CN3104 (2P, 0.8mm) on with the cabinet (L) (Control switch block (FK-30350))
And connect the BJ-1 board to the following connector of VC- removed.
245 board. After completing adjustments, be sure to exit the “Forced Power
VC-245 board CN003 (60P, 0.4mm) ON mode”.
3) The Lens block and EVF block need not to be connected. To
Note 4: Exiting the “Forced Power ON” mode
remove them, disconnect the following connectors.
1) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 01.
1. VC-245 board CN001 (88P, 0.4mm) 2) Select page: D, address: 10, set data: 00, and press the PAUSE
2. CF-75 board CN3353 (8P, 0.5mm) button of the adjustment remote commander.
4) As removing CN002 of VC-245 board (removing the control 3) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 00.
switch block (FK-30350)) means removing the lithium 3V
power supply, data such as date, time, user-set menus will be
lost. After completing adjustments, reset these data. If the
CN002 has been removed, the self-diagnosis data, data on
history of use (total drum rotation time etc.) will be lost. Before
removing, note down the self-diagnosis data (data of page: 2,
address: B0 to C6) and the data on history use (data of page: 2,
address: A2 to AA). (Refer to “5-4.Service Mode” for the data
on the history use and the self-diagnosis data.)
5) If the “Forced VTR power ON” mode is set, the cabinet (L)
(power switch, control switch block (FK-30350), and speaker)
need not be connected. To remove the cabinet (L), disconnect
the following connectors.
VC-245 board CN002 (39P, 0.3mm)

5-37
3-1-3. Adjusting Connectors
Some of the adjusting points of the video section are concentrated
at VC-245 board CN004. Connect the measuring instruments via
CN004
the CPC-6 flexible jig (J-6082-370-B) and CPC-6 terminal board
2 1
jig (J-6082-371-A). The following table lists the pin numbers and
signal names of CN004. 20 19
Pin No. Signal Name Pin No. Signal Name
1 LANC SIG 2
3 4 EVF VG
5 EVF VCO 6 GND
7 8
9 10
11 12 TMS
13 TCK 14 TDI
15 TDO 16 GND Remove the CPC lid
17 SWP 18 RF IN/LANC JACK IN
Screw (M1.7 × 2.5)
19 GND 20 RF MON
Fig. 5-3-1
Table 5-3-1.

3-1-4. Connecting the Equipment

Connect the measuring instruments as shown in Fig. 5-3-2, and
perform the adjustments.

TV monitor

VIDEO
(Yellow)
Main unit
AUDIO L (White)
Adjustment
remote
commander
AUDIO R (Red)
LANC jack AUDIO/VIDEO jack

Fig. 5-3-2.

5-38
3-1-5. Alignment Tapes
Use the alignment tapes shown in the following table.
Use tapes specified in the signal column of each adjustment.
Name Use
Tracking standard (XH2-1) Tape path adjustment
SW/OL standard (XH2-3) Switching position adjustment
Audio operation check
Audio system adjustment
(XH5-3 (NTSC), XH5-3P (PAL))
System operation check
Operation check
(XH5-5 (NTSC), XH5-5P (PAL))
BIST check
BIST check
(XH5-6 (NTSC), XH5-6P (PAL))

Fig. 5-3-3 shows the 75% color bar signals recorded on the alignment
tape for Audio Operation Check.

Note: Measure with video terminal (Terminated at 75 Ω)

For NTSC model

White (100%)
Yellow

Cyan

Magenta
Green

White (75%)

Magenta
Red

White
Burst signal
Blue

Yellow

Green
Cyan

Red

Blue
0.714V
(75%)
1V
0.286V
0.286V Q I Black
Q I

White
(100%)
Horizontal sync signal
Color bar signal waveform Color bar pattern

For PAL model

White (100%)
Yellow

Green
Cyan

Magenta
Red
Blue

0.7V
Magenta
Green
Yellow

1V
Cyan
White

Red
Blue
Black

0.3V
0.3V (100%)

Burst signal
Horizontal sync signal
Color bar signal waveform Color bar pattern

Fig. 5-3-3. Color bar signal of alignment tapes

3-1-6. Input/Output Level and Impedance

Video input/output Audio input/output
Special stereo mini jack Special stereo mini jack
Video signal: 1 Vp-p, 75 Ω unbalanced, Input level: 327mV
sync negative Input impedance: More than 47kΩ
S video input/output Output level: 327 mV (at load impedance 47 kΩ)
4-pin mini DIN Output impedance: Below 2.2 kΩ
Luminance signal: 1 Vp-p, 75 Ω unbalanced,
sync negative
Chrominance signal: 0.286 Vp-p, 75 Ω unbalanced (NTSC)
: 0.300 Vp-p, 75 Ω unbalanced (PAL)

5-39
3-2. SYSTEM CONTROL SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT 2-2. Serial No. Input
Write the serial No. and model code in the EEPROM (nonvolatile
1. Initialization of B, C, D, E, F, 7, 8 Page Data memory). Convert the serial No. on the name plate from decimal to
If the B, C, D, E, F, 7, 8 page data is erased due to some reason, hexadecimal, and write in the EEPROM.
perform “1-2. INITIALIZATION OF B, C, D, E, F, 7, 8 PAGE Page C
DATA”, of “5-1. CAMERA SECTION ADJUSTMENT” Address ED, EE, EF
2. Serial No. Input Input method:
2-1. Company ID Input 1) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 01.
Write the company ID in the EEPROM (nonvolatile memory). 2) Read the serial No. on the name plate, and take it as D1.
Page C Example: If the serial No. is 77881.
Address E8, E9, EA, EB, EC D1=77881
3) Obtain D2 and H1 corresponding to D1 from Table 5-3-2.
Input method: Example: If D1 is “77881”.
1) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 01. D2=D1–65536=12345
2) Input the following data to page: C, addresses: E8 to EC. H1=FE
Note: Press the PAUSE button of the adjustment remote commander H1 (Hexadecimal)
each time to set the data. D1 (Decimal) D2 (Decimal)
(Service model code)
Address Data 000001 to 065535 D1 FE
E8 08 065536 to 131071 D1–65536 FE
E9 00 131072 to 196607 D1–131072 FE
EA 46 Table 5-3-2.
EB 01
EC 01 4) Input H1 to page: C, address: ED. (Model code input)
Example: If H1 is “FE”.
3) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 00. Select page: C, address: ED, set data: FE, and
press the PAUSE button.
5) Obtain the maximum decimal not exceeding D2 from Table 5-
3-3, and take this as D3.
Example: If D2 is “12345”.
D3=12288
6) Obtain the hexadecimal corresponding to D3 from Table 5-3-3,
and take this as H3.
Example: If D3 is “12288”.
H3=3000
7) Obtain the difference D4 between D 2 and D 3. (Decimal
calculation, 0 D4 255)
D4= D2–D3
Example: If D2 is “12345” and D3 is “12288”.
D4=12345–12288=57
8) Convert D4 to hexadecimal, and take this as H4.
(Refer to “Hexadecimal-decimal conversion table” in “5-4.
Service Mode”.)
Example: If D4 is “57”.
H4=39
9) Input the upper 2 digits of H3 to page: C, address: EE.
Example: If H3 is “3000”.
Select page: C, address: EE, set data: 30, and
press the PAUSE button.
10) Input H4 to page: C, address: EF.
Example: If H4 is “39”.
Select page: C, address: EF, set data: 39, and
press the PAUSE button.
11) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 00.

5-40
 Hexa- Hexa- Hexa- Hexa- Hexa- Hexa- Hexa- Hexa-
Decimal decimal Decimal decimal Decimal decimal Decimal decimal Decimal decimal Decimal decimal Decimal decimal Decimal decimal
(D3) (H3) (D3) (H3) (D3) (H3) (D3) (H3) (D3) (H3) (D3) (H3) (D3) (H3) (D3) (H3)
0 0000 8192 2000 16384 4000 24576 6000 32768 8000 40960 A000 49152 C000 57344 E000
256 0100 8448 2100 16640 4100 24832 6100 33024 8100 41216 A100 49408 C100 57600 E100
512 0200 8704 2200 16896 4200 25088 6200 33280 8200 41472 A200 49664 C200 57856 E200
768 0300 8960 2300 17152 4300 25344 6300 33536 8300 41728 A300 49920 C300 58112 E300
1024 0400 9216 2400 17408 4400 25600 6400 33792 8400 41984 A400 50176 C400 58368 E400
1280 0500 9472 2500 17664 4500 25856 6500 34048 8500 42240 A500 50432 C500 58624 E500
1536 0600 9728 2600 17920 4600 26112 6600 34304 8600 42496 A600 50688 C600 58880 E600
1792 0700 9984 2700 18176 4700 26368 6700 34560 8700 42752 A700 50944 C700 59136 E700
2048 0800 10240 2800 18432 4800 26624 6800 34816 8800 43008 A800 51200 C800 59392 E800
2304 0900 10496 2900 18688 4900 26880 6900 35072 8900 43264 A900 51456 C900 59648 E900
2560 0A00 10752 2A00 18944 4A00 27136 6A00 35328 8A00 43520 AA00 51712 CA00 59904 EA00
2816 0B00 11008 2B00 19200 4B00 27392 6B00 35584 8B00 43776 AB00 51968 CB00 60160 EB00
3072 0C00 11264 2C00 19456 4C00 27648 6C00 35840 8C00 44032 AC00 52224 CC00 60416 EC00
3328 0D00 11520 2D00 19712 4D00 27904 6D00 36096 8D00 44288 AD00 52480 CD00 60672 ED00
3584 0E00 11776 2E00 19968 4E00 28160 6E00 36352 8E00 44544 AE00 52736 CE00 60928 EE00
3840 0F00 12032 2F00 20224 4F00 28416 6F00 36608 8F00 44800 AF00 52992 CF00 61184 EF00
4096 1000 12288 3000 20480 5000 28672 7000 36864 9000 45056 B000 53248 D000 61440 F000
4352 1100 12544 3100 20736 5100 28928 7100 37120 9100 45312 B100 53504 D100 61696 F100
4608 1200 12800 3200 20992 5200 29184 7200 37376 9200 45568 B200 53760 D200 61952 F200
4864 1300 13056 3300 21248 5300 29440 7300 37632 9300 45824 B300 54016 D300 62208 F300
5120 1400 13312 3400 21504 5400 29696 7400 37888 9400 46080 B400 54272 D400 62464 F400
5376 1500 13568 3500 21760 5500 29952 7500 38144 9500 46336 B500 54528 D500 62720 F500
5632 1600 13824 3600 22016 5600 30208 7600 38400 9600 46592 B600 54784 D600 62976 F600
5888 1700 14080 3700 22272 5700 30464 7700 38656 9700 46848 B700 55040 D700 63232 F700
6144 1800 14336 3800 22528 5800 30720 7800 38912 9800 47104 B800 55296 D800 63488 F800
6400 1900 14592 3900 22784 5900 30976 7900 39168 9900 47360 B900 55552 D900 63744 F900
6656 1A00 14848 3A00 23040 5A00 31232 7A00 39424 9A00 47616 BA00 55808 DA00 64000 FA00
6912 1B00 15104 3B00 23296 5B00 31488 7B00 39680 9B00 47872 BB00 56064 DB00 64256 FB00
7168 1C00 15360 3C00 23552 5C00 31744 7C00 39936 9C00 48128 BC00 56320 DC00 64512 FC00
7424 1D00 15616 3D00 23808 5D00 32000 7D00 40192 9D00 48384 BD00 56576 DD00 64768 FD00
7680 1E00 15872 3E00 24064 5E00 32256 7E00 40448 9E00 48640 BE00 56832 DE00 65024 FE00
7936 1F00 16128 3F00 24320 5F00 32512 7F00 40704 9F00 48896 BF00 57088 DF00 65280 FF00
Table 5-3-3.

5-41
3. Touch Panel Adjustment (VC-245 board) 4. Battery End Check (VC-245 board)
Adjust the calibration of the touch panel. Check the battery end voltage.
Mode VTR stop Mode Camera recording and VTR playback
Signal Arbitrary Subject Arbitrary
Adjustment Page D
Note: It is normal though the following symptoms appear during the battery
Adjustment Address E0 to E3 end check.
1) The message of “FOR InfoLITHIUM BATTERY ONLY” on
Note 1: Protect the Touch panel (LCD screen) with a transparent sheet. the LCD or viewfinder screen.
Note 2: Turn off the HOLD switch of the adjustment remote commander. 2) The tally lamp is flashing.

Adjusting method: Connection:

1) While pressing the DISPLAY button, set the POWER switch 1) Connect the regulated power supply and the digital voltmeter
from OFF to VCR (or PLAYER). to the battery terminal as shown in Fig. 5-3-5.
2) Using a ball-point pen etc., push the center of “×” indicated in
the part A. Checking method:
3) Using a ball-point pen etc., push the center of “×” indicated in 1) Adjust the output voltage of the regulated power supply so that
the part B. the digital voltmeter display is 3.5 ± 0.1Vdc.
4) Using a ball-point pen etc., push the center of “×” indicated in 2) Turn off the power supply.
the part C. 3) Turn on the HOLD switch of the adjustment remote
commander.
4) Turn on the power supply.
5) Load a cassette, and set to the camera recording mode.
6) Decrease the output voltage of the regulated power supply so
A that the digital voltmeter display is 3.3 ± 0.1Vdc.
C 7) Record the camera signal for a minute.
8) Playback the recorded section and check that the playback
picture and sound are normal.

Regulated power supply

+
+
Fig. 5-3-4.
3.3 ± 0.01 Vdc

Digital volt meter

Fig. 5-3-5.

5-42
3-3. SERVO AND RF SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT 2. PLL f0 & LPF f0 Adjustment (VC-245 Board)
Before perform the servo and RF system adjustments, check that
the specified value of “36 MHz Origin Oscillation Adjustment” of Mode VTR stop
“CAMERA SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT” is satisfied. Measurement Point Display data of page: 3, address: 03
Adjusting Procedure: Measuring Instrument Adjustment remote commander
1. Cap FG duty adjustment Adjustment Page C
2. PLL f0 & LPF f0 adjustment Adjustment Address 1F, 20, 22, 29
3. Switching position adjustment Specified Value Bit2, bit3, bit4 and bit6 are “0”
4. AGC center level
5. APC & AEQ adjustment Adjusting method:
1. Cap FG Duty Adjustment (VC-245 Board) Order Page Address Data Procedure
Set the Cap FG signal duty cycle to 50% to establish an appropriate 1 0 01 01 Set the data.
capstan servo. If deviated, the uneven rotation of capstan and noise 2 3 01 30 Set the data, and press PAUSE
can occur. button.
Measurement Point Display data of page: 3, address: 03 3 3 02 Check that the data changes to
Measuring Instrument Adjustment remote commander “00”.
Adjustment Page C 4 3 03 Check that bit2, bit3, bit4 and
Adjustment Address 16 bit6 are “0”. (Note)
Specified Value 00 5 0 01 00 Set the data.

Note: If bit2, bit3, bit4 or bit6 of the data is “1”, there are errors.
Adjusting method:
For the error contents, see the following table. (For the bit values,
Order Page Address Data Procedure refer to “5-4. SERVICE MODE”, “4-3. 3. Bit value discrimination”.)
1 Close the cassette compartment
without inserting a cassette. Bit value of page: 3, Error contents
2 0 01 01 Set the data. address: 03 data
3 3 01 1B Set the data, and press PAUSE bit 4 = 1 PLL f0 is defective
button. bit 6 = 1 LPF f0 is defective
4 3 02 Check that the data changes in bit 3 = 1 PLL f0 final adjustment is defective
the following order.
bit 2 = 1 PLL f0 final adjustment time-out
“1B” → “2B” → “00”
5 3 03 Check that the data is “00”.
(Note)
6 0 01 00 Set the data.

Note: If the data is “01”, adjustment has errors or the mechanism deck is
defective.

5-43
3. Switching Position Adjustment (VC-245 Board) 4. AGC Center Level and APC & AEQ Adjustment

Mode VTR playback 4-1. Preparations before adjustments

Signal SW/OL reference tape (XH2-3) Mode Camera recording
Measurement Point Display data of page: 3, address: 03 Subject Arbitrary
Measuring Instrument Adjustment remote commander
Adjusting method:
Adjustment Page C
Order Page Address Data Procedure
Adjustment Address 10, 11, 12, 13
1 2 30 40 Set the data.
Specified Value 00
2 Record the camera signal for
three minutes.
Adjusting method:
Order Page Address Data Procedure 4-2. AGC Center Level Adjustment (VC-245 Board)
1 Insert the SW/OL reference tape Mode Playback
and enter the VTR STOP mode.
Signal Recorded signal at “Preparations
2 0 01 01 Set the data. before adjustments”
3 3 21 Check that the data is “02”. Measurement Point Pin w; of CN004 (RF MON) (Note 1)
(Note1) Ext. trigger: Pin qj of CN004 (SWP)
4 3 01 0D Set the data, and press PAUSE Measuring Instrument Oscilloscope
button.
Adjustment Page C
5 3 02 Check that the data changes to
Adjustment Address 1E
“00”.
Specified Value The data of page: 3, address: 03 is
6 3 03 Check that the data is “00”.
“00”
(Note2)
7 0 01 00 Set the data. Note 1: Connect a 75Ω resistor between Pin w; and Pin ql (GND) of
CN004.
Note1: If the data of page: 3, address: 21 is “72”, the tape top being played. 75Ω resistor (Parts code: 1-247-804-11)
After playing the tape for 1 to 2 seconds, stop it, perform step 4
and higher. Adjusting method:
Note2: If bit 0 of the data is “1”, the even channel is defective. If bit 1 is
“1”, the odd channel is defective. Contents of the defect is written Order Page Address Data Procedure
into page: C, addresses: 10 and 12. See the following table. (For 1 Playback the recorded signal at
the bit values, refer to “5-4. SERVICE MODE”, “4-3. 3. Bit value “Preparations before
discrimination”.) adjustments”
2 0 01 01 Set the data.
When the even channel is defective
3 3 33 08 Set the data.
Data of page: C, Contents of defect
4 Confirm that the playback RF
address: 10
signal is stable. (Fig. 5-3-5.)
EE Writing into EEPROM (IC502) is defective
5 3 01 23 Set the data, and press PAUSE
E8 Adjustment data is out of range button.
E7 No data is returned from IC301 (CAIN) 6 3 02 Check that the data is “00”.
7 3 03 Check that the data is “00”.
When the odd channel is defective
(Note2)
Data of page: C, Contents of defect
8 Perform “APC & AEQ
address: 12 Adjustment”.
EE Writing into EEPROM (IC502) is defective
E8 Adjustment data is out of range Note2: If the data of page: 3, address: 03 is other than “00”, adjustment
has errors. (Take an appropriate remedial measures according to
E7 No data is returned from IC301 (CAIN) the errors referring to the following table.)

PB RF signal is stable
Data Contents of defect
20 Perform re-adjustment. (Note 3)
30 The machine is defective
Pin w; 40 Perform re-adjustment. (Note 3)
50 The machine is defective

Note 3: If this data is displayed twice successively, the machine is defective.

Pin qj

6.7 msec

Fig. 5-3-5.

5-44
4-3. APC & AEQ Adjustment (VC-245 Board) 4-4. Processing after Completing Adjustments

Mode Playback Order Page Address Data Procedure

Signal Recorded signal at “Preparations 1 2 30 00 Set the data.
before adjustments” 2 3 33 00 Set the data.
Measurement Point Pin w; of CN004 (RF MON) (Note 1) 3 0 01 00 Set the data.
Ext. trigger: Pin qj of CN004 (SWP)
Measuring Instrument Oscilloscope
Adjustment Page C
Adjustment Address 18, 19, 1B, 1C, 21, 2C
Specified Value The data of page: 3, address: 03 is
“00”

Note 1: Connect a 75Ω resistor between Pin w; and Pin ql (GND) of

CN004.
75Ω resistor (Parts code: 1-247-804-11)
Note 2: The “AGC Center Level Adjustment” must have already been
completed before starting this adjustment.

Adjusting method:
Order Page Address Data Procedure
1 Playback the recorded signal at
“Preparations before
adjustments”
2 0 01 01 Set the data.
3 3 33 08 Set the data.
4 Confirm that the playback RF
signal is stable. (Fig. 5-3-6.)
5 3 01 07 Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
6 3 02 Check that the data changes
from “07” to “00” in about 20
seconds after pressing PAUSE
button.
7 3 03 Check that the data is “00”.
(Note3)
8 Perform “Processing after
Completing Adjustments”.

Note3: If the data is other than “00”, adjustment has errors. Take an
appropriate remedial measures according to the errors referring to
the following table.

Data Contents of defect

20 Perform re-adjustment. (Note 4)
30 The machine is defective
50 Perform re-adjustment. (Note 4)
60 The machine is defective
80 The machine is defective

Note 4: If this data is displayed twice successively, the machine is defective.

PB RF signal is stable

Pin w;

Pin qj

6.7 msec
Fig. 5-3-6.
5-45
3-4. VIDEO SYSTEM ADJUSTMENTS 2. S VIDEO OUT Y Level Adjustment (VC-245 Board)
Before perform the video system adjustments, check that the
specified value of “36MHz Origin Oscillation Adjustment” of Mode Camera
“CAMERA SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT” is satisfied. Subject Arbitrary
3-4-1. Base Band Block Adjustments Measurement Point Y signal terminal of S VIDEO jack
(75Ω terminated)
1. Chroma BPF f0 Adjustment (VC-245 Board) Measuring Instrument Oscilloscope
Set the center frequency of IC1301 chroma band-pass filter. Adjustment Page C
Mode Camera Adjustment Address 25
Subject All black Specified Value A = 1000 ± 14mV
(Cover the lens with the lens cap)
Measurement Point CH1: Chroma signal terminal of Adjusting method:
S VIDEO jack (75Ω terminated) Order Page Address Data Procedure
CH2: Y signal terminal of S VIDEO 1 0 01 01 Set the data.
jack (75Ω terminated)
2 2 35 Note down the data.
Measuring Instrument Oscilloscope
3 2 35 01 Set the data.
Adjustment Page C
4 3 0C 02 Set the data, and press PAUSE
Adjustment Address 28 button.
Specified Value A = 100mVp-p or less 5 C 25 Change the data and set the Y
B = 200mVp-p or more signal level (A) to the specified
value.
Adjusting method:
6 C 25 Press PAUSE button.
Order Page Address Data Procedure
7 3 0C 00 Set the data, and press PAUSE
1 0 01 01 Set the data. button.
2 Check that the burst signal (B) is 8 2 35 Set the data that is noted down at
output to the chroma signal step 2.
terminal of S VIDEO jack.
9 0 01 00 Set the data.
3 3 0C 04 Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
4 C 28 Change the data for minimum
amplitude of the burst signal Center of luminance line
level (A).
(The data should be “00” to
“07”.)
5 C 28 Press PAUSE button. A
6 3 0C 00 Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
7 Check that the burst signal level
(B) satisfies the specified value.
H
8 0 01 00 Set the data.
Fig. 5-3-8.
When the data of page: 3, address: 0C, is 04:
A

CH1

CH2

When the data of page: 3, address: 0C, is 00:

CH1 B

H
Fig. 5-3-7.

5-46
3. S VIDEO OUT Chroma Level Adjustment 4. VIDEO OUT Y, Chroma Level Check (VC-245 Board)
(VC-245 Board)
Mode Camera
Mode Camera Subject Arbitrary
Subject Arbitrary Measurement Point VIDEO terminal of AUDIO/VIDEO
Measurement Point Chroma signal terminal of S VIDEO jack (75Ω terminated)
jack (75Ω terminated) Measuring Instrument Oscilloscope
External trigger: Y signal terminal of
Specified Value Sync level: A = 286 ± 18mV(NTSC)
S VIDEO jack
A = 300 ± 18mV(PAL)
Measuring Instrument Oscilloscope Burst level: B = 286 ± 18mV(NTSC)
Adjustment Page C B = 300 ± 18mV(PAL)
Adjustment Address 26, 27
Adjusting method:
Specified Value Cr level: A = 714 ± 14mV(NTSC)
A = 700 ± 14mV(PAL) Order Page Address Data Procedure
Cb level: B = 714 ± 14mV(NTSC) 1 2 35 Note down the data.
B = 700 ± 14mV(PAL) 2 2 35 01 Set the data.
Burst level: C = 286 ± 6mV(NTSC)
3 3 0C 02 Set the data, and press PAUSE
C = 300 ± 6mV(PAL)
button.
Adjusting method: 4 Check that the sync signal level
(A) satisfies the specified value.
Order Page Address Data Procedure
5 Check that the burst signal level
1 0 01 01 Set the data.
(B) satisfies the specified value.
2 2 35 Note down the data.
6 3 0C 00 Set the data, and press PAUSE
3 2 35 01 Set the data. button.
4 3 0C 02 Set the data, and press PAUSE 7 2 35 Set the data that is noted down at
button. step 1.
5 C 26 Change the data and set the Cr 8 0 01 00 Set the data.
signal level (A) to the specified
value.
6 C 26 Press PAUSE button.
7 C 27 Change the data and set the Cb
signal level (B) to the specified
value.
8 C 27 Press PAUSE button.
9 Check that the burst signal level
B
(C) is satisfied the specified value.
10 3 0C 00 Set the data, and press PAUSE A
button.
11 2 35 Set the data that is noted down at H
step 2. Fig. 5-3-10.
12 0 01 00 Set the data.

A B

0.28 µsec (NTSC) 0.28 µsec (NTSC)

0.23 µsec (PAL) 0.23 µsec (PAL)
Fig. 5-3-9.
5-47
3-4-2. BIST Check 1-3. IC301 AUD (ABUS) PB BIST Check
Order Page Address Data Procedure
Switch setting:
1 3 11 04 Set the data, and press PAUSE
LCD panel ...................................................................... Open
button.
1. Playback System Check 2 3 12 08 Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
1-1. Preparations for Playback 3 3 12 00 Set the data, and press PAUSE
Order Page Address Data Procedure button.
1 Set the POWER switch to VCR 4 3 13 03 Set the data, and press PAUSE
or PLAYER position. button.
2 Connect the adjustment remote 5 3 14 Check that the data is the
commander and set the HOLD following value.
switch to ON (SERVICE) NTSC model: 41
position. PAL model: 2D
3 0 01 01 Set the data. 6 3 15 Check that the data is the
following value.
4 C 42 00 Set the data, and press PAUSE
NTSC model: 81
button.
PAL model: 7C
5 Playback the BIST check tape.
7 3 If the data of address 14 and
(XH5-6 (NTSC), XH5-6P (PAL))
address 15 are correct, IC301
6 Press DISPLAY button and erase AUD (ABUS) playback system
the indicators on the LCD screen. is normal.
Note1: Perform the following checks in the playback mode. 1-4. IC301 VFD PB BIST Check
Note2: Use the AC power adaptor or the battery (Info LITHIUM S series).
• EX Y BIST Check
1-2. IC301 TRX (RF) PB BIST Check Order Page Address Data Procedure
Order Page Address Data Procedure 1 3 12 10 Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
1 3 70 04 Set the data, and press PAUSE
button. 2 3 12 00 Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
2 3 70 00 Set the data, and press PAUSE
button. 3 3 13 04 Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
3 3 73 Check that the data is equal to
either of the following values. 4 3 14 Check that the data is the
And memorize the case number following value.
of the value. NTSC model: FB
NTSC model: PAL model: 54
63 (Case1), C5 (Case2), 5 3 15 Check that the data is the
75 (Case3), D3 (Case4), following value.
59 (Case5), FF (Case6) NTSC model: F4
PAL model: PAL model: ED
86 (Case1), AA (Case2), 6 3 If the data of address 14 and
90 (Case3) address 15 are correct, IC301
4 3 74 Check that the data is equal to EX Y playback system is
the following value which case normal.
number is equal to that of
address 73.
NTSC model:
84 (Case1), 55 (Case2),
07 (Case3), D6 (Case4),
01 (Case5), D0 (Case6)
PAL model:
35 (Case1), 33 (Case2),
B6 (Case3)
5 3 If the data of address 73 and
address 74 are correct, IC301
TRX (RF) playback system is
normal.

5-48
• EVF Y BIST Check • EVF Cb BIST Check
Order Page Address Data Procedure Order Page Address Data Procedure
1 3 10 88 Set the data, and press PAUSE 1 3 10 8A Set the data, and press PAUSE
button. button.
2 3 12 10 Set the data, and press PAUSE 2 3 12 10 Set the data, and press PAUSE
button. button.
3 3 12 00 Set the data, and press PAUSE 3 3 12 00 Set the data, and press PAUSE
button. button.
4 3 13 04 Set the data, and press PAUSE 4 3 13 04 Set the data, and press PAUSE
button. button.
5 3 14 Check that the data is the 5 3 14 Check that the data is the
following value. following value.
NTSC model: 9B NTSC model: A9
PAL model: 20 PAL model: AA
6 3 15 Check that the data is the 6 3 15 Check that the data is the
following value. following value.
NTSC model: C3 NTSC model: 39
PAL model: F8 PAL model: 03
7 3 If the data of address 14 and 7 3 If the data of address 14 and
address 15 are correct, IC301 address 15 are correct, IC301
EVF Y playback system is EVF Cb playback system is
normal. normal.

• EVF Cr BIST Check • PANEL Y BIST Check

Order Page Address Data Procedure Order Page Address Data Procedure
1 3 10 89 Set the data, and press PAUSE 1 3 10 98 Set the data, and press PAUSE
button. button.
2 3 12 10 Set the data, and press PAUSE 2 3 12 10 Set the data, and press PAUSE
button. button.
3 3 12 00 Set the data, and press PAUSE 3 3 12 00 Set the data, and press PAUSE
button. button.
4 3 13 04 Set the data, and press PAUSE 4 3 13 04 Set the data, and press PAUSE
button. button.
5 3 14 Check that the data is the 5 3 14 Check that the data is the
following value. following value.
NTSC model: 2E NTSC model: 9B
PAL model: 33 PAL model: 20
6 3 15 Check that the data is the 6 3 15 Check that the data is the
following value. following value.
NTSC model: 34 NTSC model: C3
PAL model: DD PAL model: F8
7 3 If the data of address 14 and 7 3 If the data of address 14 and
address 15 are correct, IC301 address 15 are correct, IC301
EVF Cr playback system is PANEL Y playback system is
normal. normal.

5-49
• PANEL Cr BIST Check 1-5. IC301 ENCODER BIST Check
Order Page Address Data Procedure • Preparations
1 3 10 99 Set the data, and press PAUSE Order Page Address Data Procedure
button. 1 0 01 01 Set the data.
2 3 12 10 Set the data, and press PAUSE 2 8 21 0F Set the data, and press PAUSE
button. button.
3 3 12 00 Set the data, and press PAUSE
button. • ENCODER Ya BIST Check
4 3 13 04 Set the data, and press PAUSE Order Page Address Data Procedure
button. 1 3 10 8B Set the data, and press PAUSE
5 3 14 Check that the data is the button.
following value. 2 3 12 10 Set the data, and press PAUSE
NTSC model: 2E button.
PAL model: 33 3 3 12 00 Set the data, and press PAUSE
6 3 15 Check that the data is the button.
following value. 4 3 13 04 Set the data, and press PAUSE
NTSC model: 34 button.
PAL model: DD
5 3 14 Check that the data is the
7 3 If the data of address 14 and following value.
address 15 are correct, IC301 NTSC model: FD
PANEL Cr playback system is PAL model: 58
normal.
6 3 15 Check that the data is the
following value.
• PANEL Cb BIST Check
NTSC model: 3E
Order Page Address Data Procedure PAL model: BE
1 3 10 9A Set the data, and press PAUSE 7 3 If the data of address 14 and
button. address 15 are correct, IC301
2 3 12 10 Set the data, and press PAUSE ENCORDER Ya playback
button. system is normal.
3 3 12 00 Set the data, and press PAUSE
button. • ENCODER Yb BIST Check
4 3 13 04 Set the data, and press PAUSE Order Page Address Data Procedure
button. 1 3 10 8C Set the data, and press PAUSE
5 3 14 Check that the data is the button.
following value. 2 3 12 10 Set the data, and press PAUSE
NTSC model: A9 button.
PAL model: AA 3 3 12 00 Set the data, and press PAUSE
6 3 15 Check that the data is the button.
following value. 4 3 13 04 Set the data, and press PAUSE
NTSC model: 39 button.
PAL model: 03
5 3 14 Check that the data is the
7 3 If the data of address 14 and following value.
address 15 are correct, IC301 NTSC model: 94
PANEL Cb playback system is PAL model: A1
normal.
6 3 15 Check that the data is the
following value.
NTSC model: D6
PAL model: ED
7 3 If the data of address 14 and
address 15 are correct, IC301
ENCORDER Yb playback
system is normal.

5-50
• ENCODER Ca BIST Check 1-6. Processing after Completing Playback System
Order Page Address Data Procedure Check
1 3 10 8D Set the data, and press PAUSE
button. Order Page Address Data Procedure
2 3 12 10 Set the data, and press PAUSE 1 0 01 01 Set the data.
button. 2 C 42 Set the following data, and press
3 3 12 00 Set the data, and press PAUSE PAUSE button.
button. 00: DCR-PC4E
28: DCR-PC5/PC5E
4 3 13 04 Set the data, and press PAUSE
button. 3 8 21 03 Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
5 3 14 Check that the data is equal to
either of the following values. 4 0 01 00 Set the data.
And memorize the case number 5 Turn off the power and turn on
of the value. again.
NTSC model:
11 (Case1), 4E (Case2)
PAL model:
E8 (Case1), 7B (Case2)
6 3 15 Check that the data is equal to
the following value which case
number is equal to that of
address 14.
NTSC model:
FD (Case1), 3B (Case2)
PAL model:
62 (Case1), B0 (Case2)
7 3 If the data of address 14 and
address 15 are correct, IC301
ENCODER Ca playback system
is normal.

• ENCODER Cb BIST Check

Order Page Address Data Procedure
1 3 10 8E Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
2 3 12 10 Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
3 3 12 00 Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
4 3 13 04 Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
5 3 14 Check that the data is equal to
either of the following values.
And memorize the case number
of the value.
NTSC model:
5C (Case1), BC (Case2)
PAL model:
96 (Case1), 35 (Case2)
6 3 15 Check that the data is equal to
the following value which case
number is equal to that of
address 14.
NTSC model:
20 (Case1), A8 (Case2)
PAL model:
79 (Case1), 7C (Case2)
7 3 If the data of address 14 and
address 15 are correct, IC301
ENCODER Cb playback system
is normal.

5-51
2. Recording System Check

2-1. Preparations for recording 2-3. Processing after Completing Recording System
Check
Order Page Address Data Procedure
1 Playback the BIST check tape. Order Page Address Data Procedure
(XH5-6(NTSC), XH5-6P(PAL)) 1 3 01 00 Set the data, and press PAUSE
2 3 10 C0 Set the data, and press PAUSE button.
button. 2 Turn off the power and turn on
3 3 11 07 Set the data, and press PAUSE again.
button.
4 Enter the stop mode.
5 While keep the HOLD switch of
the adjustment remote
commander at ON (SERVICE)
position, eject the BIST check
tape.
6 Close the cassette compartment
without inserting a cassette.
7 Set the power switch to
“CAMERA”.
8 3 01 0C Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.

2-2. IC301 TRX (RF) REC BIST Check

Order Page Address Data Procedure
1 3 70 04 Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
2 3 70 00 Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
3 3 71 Check that the data is equal to
either of the following values.
And memorize the case number
of the value.
NTSC model:
26 (Case1), 5E (Case2)
PAL model:
53 (Case1), 77 (Case2)
4 3 72 Check that the data is equal to
the following value which case
number is equal to that of
address 71.
NTSC model:
95 (Case1), E3 (Case2)
PAL model:
DF (Case1), D5 (Case2)
5 3 If the data of address 71 and
address 72 are correct, IC301
TRX (RF) recording system is
normal.

5-52
3-5. AUDIO SYSTEM ADJUSTMENTS

[Connection of Audio System Measuring Devices]

Connect the audio system measuring devices as shown in Fig. 5-3-11.

Recording (Camera mode) Main unit

MIC
Audio oscillator 600 Ω Left

Attenuator Right

600 Ω: 270 Ω (1-249-410-11) + 330 Ω (1-249-411-11)

Playback
Main unit
TV monitor
Video (Yellow)

Left (White)
Audio level meter
AUDIO/ 47k Ω or Distortion meter
VIDEO Right
OUT
(Red) 47k Ω

47k Ω (1-249-437-11)

Fig. 5-3-11.

5-53
1. Playback Level Check 4. Overall Noise Level Check
Mode VTR playback Mode Camera recording and playback
Signal Alignment tape: Signal No signal: Insert a shorting plug in the
For audio operation check MIC jack
(XH5-3 (NTSC)) Measurement Point Audio left or right terminal of AUDIO
(XH5-3P (PAL)) VIDEO jack
Measurement Point Audio left or right terminal of AUDIO Measuring Instrument Audio level meter
VIDEO jack
Specified Value Below –45dBs
Measuring Instrument Audio level meter and frequency (IHF-A filter ON, 20kHz LPF ON)
counter
Specified Value 32 kHz mode: 1 kHz, +3.0 ± 2.0dBs Checking Method:
48 kHz mode: 1 kHz, +3.0 ± 2.0dBs 1) Insert a shorting plug in the MIC jack.
44.1 kHz mode: 2) Record in the camera mode.
The 7.35kHz signal level during EMP 3) Playback the recorded section.
OFF is +2.0 ± 2.0dBs. 4) Check that the noise level is the specified value.
The 7.35kHz signal level during EMP
ON is –6 ± 2 dB from the signal level 5. Overall Separation Check
during EMP OFF. Mode Camera recording and playback
Signal 400Hz, –66dBs signal: MIC jack
Checking Method:
<right> [left]
1) Check that the playback signal level is the specified value.
(Connect the MIC jack <left> [right]
to GND)
2. Overall Level Characteristics Check
Measurement Point Audio <left> [right] terminal of
Mode Camera recording and playback
AUDIO VIDEO jack
Signal 400Hz, –66 dBs signal: MIC jack left
Measuring Instrument Audio level meter
and right
Specified Value Below –40dBs (IHF-A filter ON)
Measurement Point Audio left or right terminal of AUDIO
VIDEO jack
< > : Left channel check
Measuring Instrument Audio level meter [ ] : Right channel check
Specified Value –7.5 ± 3.0dBs
Checking Method:
Checking Method: 1) Input the 400Hz, –66dBs signal in the <right> [left] terminal
1) Input the 400Hz, –66dBs signal in the MIC jack. of the MIC jack only.
2) Record in the camera mode. 2) Record in the camera mode.
3) Playback the recorded section. 3) Playback the recorded section.
4) Check that the 400Hz signal level is the specified value. 4) Check that the signal level of the audio <left> [right] terminal
is the specified value.
3. Overall Distortion Check
Mode Camera recording and playback
Signal 400Hz, –66dBs signal: MIC jack left
and right
Measurement Point Audio left or right terminal of AUDIO
VIDEO jack
Measuring Instrument Audio distortion meter
Specified Value Below 0.4%
(200Hz to 6kHz BPF ON)

Checking Method:
1) Input the 400Hz, –66dBs signal in the MIC jack.
2) Record in the camera mode.
3) Playback the recorded section.
4) Check that the distortion is the specified value.

5-54
5-4. SERVICE MODE
4-1. ADJUSTMENT REMOTE COMMANDER 2. Precautions upon using
The adjustment remote commander is used for changing the the adjustment remote commander
calculation coefficient in signal processing, EVR data, etc. The Mishandling of the adjustment remote commander may erase the
adjustment remote commander performs bi-directional correct adjustment data at times. To prevent this, it is recommended
communication with the unit using the remote commander signal that all adjustment data be noted down before beginning adjustments
line (LANC). The resultant data of this bi-directional communication and new adjustment data after each adjustment.
is written in the non-volatile memory.

1. Using the adjustment remote commander

1) Connect the adjustment remote commander to the LANC
terminal.
2) Set the HOLD switch of the adjustment remote commander to
“HOLD” (SERVICE position). If it has been properly
connected, the LCD on the adjustment remote commander will
display as shown in Fig. 5-4-1.

Page Data Address

Fig. 5-4-1

3) Operate the adjustment remote commander as follows.

• Changing the page
The page increases when the EDIT SEARCH+ button is
pressed, and decreases when the EDIT SEARCH– button is
pressed. There are altogether 16 pages, from 0 to F.
Hexadecimal
notation 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
LCD Display 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A b c d E F
Decimal notation
conversion value 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1011 12 1314 15

• Changing the address

The address increases when the FF (M) button is pressed,
and decreases when the REW (m) button is pressed. There
are altogether 256 addresses, from 00 to FF.
• Changing the data (Data setting)
The data increases when the PLAY (N) button is pressed,
and decreases when the STOP (x) button is pressed. There
are altogether 256 data, from 00 to FF.
• Writing the adjustment data
The PAUSE button must be pressed to write the adjustment
data (B, C, D, F, 7, 8 page) in the nonvolatile memory. (The
new adjusting data will not be recorded in the nonvolatile
memory if this step is not performed.)
4) After completing all adjustments, turn off the main power
supply once.

5-55
4-2. DATA PROCESS
The calculation of the DDS display and the adjustment remote
commander display data (hexadecimal notation) are required for
obtaining the adjustment data of some adjustment items. In this case,
after converting the hexadecimal notation to decimal notation,
calculate and convert the result to hexadecimal notation, and use it
as the adjustment data. Indicates the hexadecimal-decimal
conversion table.

Hexadecimal-decimal Conversion Table 2

Lower digit of
hexadecimal 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
Upper digit (A) (b) (c) (d) (E) (F)
of hexadecimal
0 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
1 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
2 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47
3 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63
4 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 77 76 77 78 79
5 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95
6 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111
7 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127
8 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143
9 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159
A (A) 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175
1 B (b) 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191
C (c) 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207
D (d) 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223
E (E) 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239
F (F) 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255
Note: The characters shown in the parenthesis ( ) shown the display on the adjustment remote commander.
(Example) If the DDS display or the adjustment remote commander shows BD (bd);
Because the upper digit of the adjustment number is B (b), and the lower digit is D (d), the meeting point
“189” of 1 and 2 in the above table is the corresponding decimal number.

Table. 5-4-1.

5-56
4-3. SERVICE MODE

1. Setting the Test Mode 2-1. EMG Code (Emergency Code)

Page D Address 10 Codes corresponding to the errors which occur are written in
addresses F4, F8 and FC. The type of error indicated by the code
are shown in the following table.
Data Function
00 Normal Code Emergency Type
01 Forced camera power ON 00 No error
02 Forced VTR power ON 10 Loading motor emergency during loading
03 Forced camera + VTR power ON 11 Loading motor emergency during unloading
05 Forced memory power ON 22 T reel emergency during normal rotation
• Before setting the data , select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 23 S reel emergency during normal rotation
01. T reel emergency (Short circuit between S reel
24
• For page D, the data set is recorded in the non-volatile memory terminal and T reel terminal)
by pressing the PAUSE button of the adjustment remote 30 FG emergency at the start up of the capstan
commander. In this case, take note that the test mode will not be 40 FG emergency at the start up of the drum
exited even when the main power is turned off. 42 FG emergency during normal rotation of the drum
• After completing adjustments/repairs, be sure to return the data
of this address to 00, and press the PAUSE button of the adjustment
remote commander.
Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 00.

2. Emergence Memory Address

Page C Address F4 to FF

Address Contents
F4 EMG code when first error occurs
Upper: MSW code when shift starts when first
F6 error occurs
Lower: MSW code when first error occurs
Lower: MSW code to be moved when first error
F7
occurs
F8 EMG code when second error occurs
Upper: MSW code when shift starts when second
FA error occurs
Lower: MSW code when second error occurs
Lower: MSW code to be moved when second error
FB
occurs
FC EMG code when last error occurs
Upper: MSW code when shift starts when last error
FE occurs
Lower: MSW code when last error occurs
Lower: MSW code to be moved when last error
FF
occurs

When no error occurs in this unit, data “00” is written in the above
addresses (F4 to FF). when first error occurs in the unit, the data
corresponding to the error is written in the first emergency address
(F4 to F7). In the same way, when the second error occurs, the data
corresponding to the error is written in the second emergency address
(F8 to FB). Finally, when the last error occurs, the data corresponding
to the error is written in the last emergency address (FC to FF).

Note: After completing adjustments, be sure to initialize the data of

addresses F4 to FF to “00”.

Initializing method:
1) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 01.
2) Select page: 3, address: 01, set data: 37, and press the PAUSE
button.
3) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 00.

5-57
2-2. MSW Code
MSW when errors occur:
Information on MSW (mode SW) when errors occur
MSW when movement starts:
Information on MSW when movements starts when the mechanism position is moved (When the L motor is moved)
MSW of target of movement:
Information on target MSW of movement when the mechanism position is moved

Mechanical Position
← UNLOAD LOAD →
EJ BL ULE BL SR BL GL BL STOP BL R/P
← C (MSB)
1 0 0 = 4

1 0 1 = 5

0 0 1 = 1

0 1 1 = 3

0 1 0 = 2

1 1 0 = 6
1 1 1 = 7

1 1 1 = 7

1 1 1 = 7

1 1 1 = 7

1 1 1 = 7
←B
← A (LSB)

LS chassis movement section

Lock released Pinch roller pressing

Cassette compartment

Position Code Contents

Position at which the cassette component lock is released, at the farthest unload side mechanically
EJ 4
at which the mechanism can move no further in the UNLOAD direction.
BL 7 BLANK code, at the boundary between codes.
EJECT completion position. when the cassette is ejected, the mechanism will stop at this position.
ULE 5 Cassette IN standby. The guide will start protruding out as the mechanism moves towards the
LOAD position.
SR 1 Position at which it is possible to release the S ratchet.
GL 3 Guide loading are performed here.
Stop position in the loading state. The pinch roller separates, the tension regulator returns, and the
STOP 2
brake is imposed on both reels.
PB, REC, CUE, REVIEW, PAUSE positions. When pinch roller is pressed, and the tension
R/P 6 regulator is ON, the mechanism is operating at this position in modes in which normal images are
shown.
NULL 0 Code not existing in the MD. Default value.

5-58
3. Bit value discrimination
Bit values must be discriminated using the display data of the
adjustment remote commander for following items. Use the table
below to discriminate if the bit value is “1” or “0”.

Display on the adjustment remote commander

Address
Page bit3 to bit0 discrimination
bit7 to bit4 discrimination

Display on the Bit values

adjustment bit3 bit2 bit1 bit0
remote or or or or
commander bit7 bit6 bit5 bit4
0 0 0 0 0
1 0 0 0 1
2 0 0 1 0
3 0 0 1 1
4 0 1 0 0
5 0 1 0 1
6 0 1 1 0
7 0 1 1 1
A 8 1 0 0 0
9 1 0 0 1
A (A) 1 0 1 0
B (b) 1 0 1 1
C (c) 1 1 0 0
D (d) 1 1 0 1
B E (E) 1 1 1 0
F (F ) 1 1 1 1
Example: If “8E” is displayed on the adjustment remote commander, the
bit values for bit7 to bit4 are shown in the A column, and the
bit values for bit3 to bit0 are shown in the B column.

4. Switch check (1)

Page 2 Address 43

Bit Function When bit value=1 When bit value=0

0 VTR MODE SW (Control switch block) OFF ON
1 CAM STBY SW (Control switch block) OFF ON
2 START/STOP SW (Control switch block) OFF ON
3 EJECT SW (Control switch block) OFF ON
4 CC DOWN SW (Mechanism chassis) OFF (UP) ON (DOWN)
5 PHOTO FREEZE SW (FK-30350 block S4004) OFF ON
6 PHOTO STBY SW (Control switch block) OFF ON
7
Using method:
1) Select page: 2, address: 43.
2) By discriminating the bit value of display data, the state of the switch can be discriminated.

5-59
5. Switch check (2)
Page 2 Address 60 to 63

Using method:
1) Select page: 2, address: 60 to 63.
2) By discriminating the display data, the pressed key can be discriminated.

Data
Address
00 (00 to 0A) 19 (0B to 24) 32 (25 to 44) 59 (45 to 6E) 85 (6F to 9F) B8 (A0 to D4) EE (D5 to FF)
60 FOCUS FOCUS PHOTO SUPER
(KEY AD0) (INFINITY) (AUTO/MANUAL) (PHOTO REC) NIGHT SHOT No key input
(IC1104 od) (FK-30350)(S4007) (FK-30350)(S4008) (FK-30350)(S4005) (FK-30350)(S4003)
61 DISPLAY BACK LIGHT EVF OFF EVF ON
(KEY AD1) (FK-30350) (FK-30350) (CF-75) (CF-75)
(IC1104 of) (S4011) (S4010) (S2201) (S2201)
62 PANEL PANEL
(KEY AD2) REVERSE NORMAL
(IC1104 og) (PR-34)(S3601) (PR-34)(S3601)
63 PANEL CLOSE PANEL OPEN
(KEY AD3) (PO-5) (PO-5)
(IC1104 oh) (S3501) (S3501)

6. Record of Use check

Note: When replacing the drum assembly, initialize the data of address: A2 to A4.
Page 2 Address A2 to AA

Address Function Remarks

A2 Minutes
A3 Drum rotation counted time (BCD code) Hour (L) 10th place digit and 1st place digit of counted time (decimal digit)
A4 Hour (H) 1000th place digit and 100th place digit of counted time (decimal digit)
A5 Year
A6 User initial power on date (BCD code) Month After setting the clock, set the date of power on next.
A7 Day
A8 Year
Final condensation occurrence date
A9 Month
(BCD code)
AA Day

Using method:
1) The record of use data is displayed at page: 2, addresses: A2 to AA.
Note: This data will be erased (reset) when the control switch block (FK-30350) is removed.

Initializing method:
1) Using the adjustment remote commander, select the object address and set data: 00.

5-60
7. Record of Self-diagnosis check
Page 2 Address B0 to C6

Address Self-diagnosis code

B0 “Repaired by” code (Occurred 1st time) *1
B1 “Block function” code (Occurred 1st time)
B2 “Detailed” code (Occurred 1st time)
B4 “Repaired by” code (Occurred 2nd time) *1
B5 “Block function” code (Occurred 2nd time)
B6 “Detailed” code (Occurred 2nd time)
B8 “Repaired by” code (Occurred 3rd time) *1
B9 “Block function” code (Occurred 3rd time)
BA “Detailed” code (Occurred 3rd time)
BC “Repaired by” code (Occurred 4th time) *1
BD “Block function” code (Occurred 4th time)
BE “Detailed” code (Occurred 4th time)
C0 “Repaired by” code (Occurred 5th time) *1
C1 “Block function” code (Occurred 5th time)
C2 “Detailed” code (Occurred 5th time)
C4 “Repaired by” code (Occurred the last time) *1
C5 “Block function” code (Occurred the last time)
C6 “Detailed” code (Occurred the last time)

*1 : “01” → “C”, “03” → “E”

Using method:
1) The past self-diagnosis codes are displayed at page: 2, addresses: BC to C6. Refer to “SELF-DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION” for detail of the
self-diagnosis code.
Note: This data will be erased (reset) when the control switch block (FK-30350) is removed.

5-61E
 DCR-PC4E/PC5/PC5E
SECTION 6
REPAIR PARTS LIST

6-1. EXPLODED VIEWS

NOTE:
• -XX, -X mean standardized parts, so they may • Abbreviation The components identified by mark 0 or
have some differences from the original one. AUS: Australian model dotted line with mark 0 are critical for safety.
• Items marked “*” are not stocked since they JE: Tourist model Replace only with part number specified.
are seldom required for routine service. Some CND: Canadian model Les composants identifiés par une marque
delay should be anticipated when ordering these CN: Chinese model 0 sont critiques pour la sécurité.
items. HK: Hong Kong model Ne les remplacer que par une pièce portant
• The mechanical parts with no reference number le numéro spécifié.
in the exploded views are not supplied.

6-1-1. OVERALL SECTION

4

3
2
1 5
Cabinet (L) section D
(See page 6-5)
C
1 6

Lens-EVF section
(See page 6-4)

4 5
-2 D
VCard
Bo Cabinet (R) block assembly
1 (See page 6-2 to 6-3)

A
B

A C
B

7
10

9 8

Ref. No. Part No. Description Remarks Ref. No. Part No. Description Remarks
1 3-989-735-11 SCREW(M1.7), LOCK ACE, P2 6 3-742-854-21 LID,BATTERY CASE (FOR RMT-809)(PC4E)
2 3-062-213-01 COVER, MIC 7 3-052-290-11 COVER, BATTERY TERMINAL
3 3-724-511-51 SHOE, ACCESSORY 8 3-062-110-02 COVER, JACK (PC5)
4 3-056-624-01 LOCK ACE, +K SCREW (M2) 8 3-062-110-11 COVER, JACK (PC5E:AEP,UK)
5 1-475-141-31 REMOTE COMMANDER (RMT-809)(PC4E) 8 3-062-110-21 COVER, JACK (PC5E:E,HK,AUS,CN,JE)

5 1-475-950-21 REMOTE COMMANDER (RMT-811)(PC5) 8 3-062-110-31 COVER, JACK (PC4E)

5 1-475-950-31 REMOTE COMMANDER (RMT-812)(PC5E) 9 3-989-735-31 SCREW(M1.7), LOCK ACE, P2
6 3-053-056-01 LID,BATTERY CASE (FOR RMT-811, 812) 10 X-3950-754-1 CAP ASSY, LENS
(PC5/PC5E)

6-1
6-1-2. CABINET (R) BLOCK ASSEMBLY-1

62
51
Cabinet (R) block assembly-2
(See page 6-3) 61
B
A

LCD901

ND901
B
57 60
51

PD
Bo -126
63 ard 59
51

52 54 55
57 58
56

51 A
53

Ref. No. Part No. Description Remarks Ref. No. Part No. Description Remarks
51 3-989-735-11 SCREW (M1.7), LOCK ACE, P2 59 3-055-802-01 SPACER, PANEL
52 X-3950-766-1 CABINET (R) ASSY, LCD (GRAY)(PC4E) 60 3-055-839-01 SHEET, PANEL PROTECTION
52 X-3950-769-1 CABINET (R) ASSY, LCD (GRAY)(PC5/PC5E) 61 1-418-928-11 PANEL, TOUCH (TP-30350)
52 X-3950-771-1 CABINET (R) ASSY, LCD (BLUE)(PC5/PC5E) 62 X-3950-748-1 CABINET (T) ASSY, LCD (GRAY)
* 53 3-062-196-01 SHEET, BL INSULATING (PC4E/PC5/PC5E)
62 X-3950-757-1 CABINET (T) ASSY, LCD (BLUE)(PC5/PC5E)
0 54 1-418-878-11 TRANSFORMER UNIT, INVERTER
55 3-062-195-01 SPACER, PD * 63 3-063-889-01 SHEET, (S)
56 A-7074-456-A PD-126 BOARD, COMPLETE LCD901 8-753-050-52 ACX300CK-J
* 57 3-051-232-01 CLIP, PCB 0 ND901 1-517-931-11 TUBE, FLUORESCENT,COLD CATHODE
58 3-060-704-01 SHEET (N), BL SHIELD

Note : Note :
The components identified by Les composants identifiés par
mark 0 or dotted line with mark une marque 0 sont critiques
0 are critical for safety. pour la sécurité.
Replace only with part number Ne les remplacer que par une
specified. pièce portant le numéro spécifié.
6-2
6-1-3. CABINET (R) BLOCK ASSEMBLY-2

114 Harness (Two cores)

131 (PR-062) (8P) (2P)
130 (8P)
104 not (14P)
supplied

113 (2P)
104 120 Harness
129 119 (8P) (PD-109) (14P)
(14P)
112 104
111
121
115
110 122
128
116 123
104 107
118 109 104
124
104
106
108 106

125
126
104 103 132 104
117 127
105
102

101

Ref. No. Part No. Description Remarks Ref. No. Part No. Description Remarks
101 3-062-193-01 SLIDER, EJECT KNOB 121 3-062-217-11 CABINET (R) (M) (BLUE)(PC5/PC5E)
102 3-062-192-01 KNOB, EJECT 122 3-062-194-01 SPACER, LOCK
103 3-062-191-01 SCREW, TRIPOD 123 3-062-109-01 LID, CPC (GRAY)(PC4E/PC5/PC5E)
104 3-989-735-11 SCREW (M1.7), LOCK ACE, P2 123 3-062-109-11 LID, CPC (BLUE) (PC5/PC5E)
105 X-3950-744-1 FRAME ASSY, BOTTOM 124 3-062-111-11 LABEL, POWER (GRAY)
(PC5/PC5E:E,HK,AUS,CN,JE)
106 A-7074-459-A BJ-1 BOARD, COMPLETE
107 3-062-211-01 SHEET, FLEXIBLE PROTECTION 124 3-062-111-21 LABEL, POWER (GRAY)(PC4E/PC5E:AEP,UK)
108 1-694-689-11 TERMINAL BOARD, BATTERY 124 3-062-111-41 LABEL, POWER (BLUE)
109 3-713-791-01 SCREW (M1.7X4), TAPPING, P2 (PC5/PC5E:E,HK,AUS,CN,JE)
110 3-062-207-01 HOLDER, BATTERY 124 3-062-111-51 LABEL, POWER (BLUE)(PC5E:AEP,UK)
125 3-062-108-11 SHEET, GUARD (GRAY)(PC4E/PC5/PC5E)
111 3-062-208-01 SHEET, BATTERY HOLDER 125 3-062-108-31 SHEET, GUARD (BLUE)(PC5/PC5E)
112 A-7074-457-A PO-5 BOARD, COMPLETE
* 113 3-055-323-01 SPRING (MK), TORSION 126 3-062-188-01 COVER, ORNAMENT
114 X-3950-747-1 PLATE ASSY, BLIND (GRAY)(PC4E/PC5/PC5E) 127 3-062-112-11 LABEL, JACK (GRAY)(PC5)
114 X-3950-756-1 PLATE ASSY, BLIND (BLUE)(PC5/PC5E) 127 3-062-112-21 LABEL, JACK (GRAY)(PC5E:AEP,UK)
127 3-062-112-31 LABEL, JACK (GRAY)(PC5E:E,HK,AUS,CN,JE)
115 A-7074-458-A PR-34 BOARD, COMPLETE 127 3-062-112-51 LABEL, JACK (BLUE)(PC5)
116 3-062-105-01 COVER (FRONT), HINGE (GRAY)
(PC4E/PC5/PC5E) 127 3-062-112-61 LABEL, JACK (BLUE)(PC5E:AEP,UK)
116 3-062-105-11 COVER (FRONT), HINGE (BLUE)(PC5/PC5E) 127 3-062-112-71 LABEL, JACK (BLUE)(PC5E:E,HK,AUS,CN,JE)
117 3-989-735-31 SCREW (M1.7), LOCK ACE, P2 127 3-062-112-81 LABEL, JACK (GRAY)(PC4E)
118 3-062-202-01 PLATE, DV FIXED * 128 3-062-786-01 SPACER, MF
* 129 3-062-788-01 TAPE (2030)
119 X-3950-746-1 HINGE ASSY, LCD
120 3-062-106-01 COVER (REAR), HINGE (GRAY) 130 1-960-422-11 HARNESS (PR-062) (8P) (2P)
(PC4E/PC5/PC5E) 131 1-960-421-11 HARNESS (PD-109) (14P)
120 3-062-106-11 COVER (REAR), HINGE (BLUE)(PC5/PC5E) * 132 3-062-924-01 CUSHION, BT
121 3-062-217-01 CABINET (R) (M) (GRAY) (PC4E/PC5/PC5E)

6-3
6-1-4. LENS-EVF SECTION

170
C
D
171
A 158
IC3201
170 B
174 172

166 168 159

151
159
158 152
167
159 170 153

169 156 154

173
not
supplied not
158 supplied 155
157
165 M905 153
M904 173 173

A 157
B
164 161
162 D
not
163 supplied
160
C
LCD902
158

170
LED902

Be sure to read “Precautions upon replacing CCD imager”

on page 4-14 when changing the CCD imager.

Ref. No. Part No. Description Remarks Ref. No. Part No. Description Remarks
151 X-3950-751-1 LENS ASSY, VF 167 1-758-155-21 FILTER BLOCK, OPTICAL (OFB-04-14)
152 X-3950-752-1 RING ASSY, VF REGULATION 168 3-053-973-01 RUBBER (W), SEAL
153 3-056-030-21 LOCK ACE (M1.7), 0 PLATE 2 MAIN 169 3-062-212-01 SHEET, CF INSULATING
154 3-062-190-01 SLEEVE, VF 170 A-7074-455-A CF-75 BOARD, COMPLETE
155 3-062-203-01 PLATE, VF ACRYLIC 171 3-713-791-41 SCREW (M1.7X5), TAPPING, P2

156 X-3950-750-1 GUIDE ASSY, VF SLEEVE * 172 3-062-201-01 FRAME, CD

157 3-713-791-51 SCREW (M1.7X3.5), TAPPING, P2 173 3-713-791-91 SCREW (M1.7X4), TAPPING, P2
158 3-989-735-11 SCREW (M1.7), LOCK ACE, P2 * 174 3-062-889-01 SHEET, LF PROTECTION
159 3-713-791-01 SCREW (M1.7X4), TAPPING, P2 IC3201 A-7031-011-A CCD BLOCK ASSY (CCD IMAGER)(PC5)
* 160 3-062-767-01 CUSHION, LCD IC3201 A-7031-012-A CCD BLOCK ASSY (CCD IMAGER)(PC4E/PC5E)

161 3-062-206-01 CUSHION (L), BL LCD902 8-753-026-74 LCX032AK-J (PC4E)

162 3-062-204-01 BLUNIT LCD902 8-753-026-77 LCX033AK-J (PC5/PC5E)
163 3-062-205-01 CUSHION (B), BL 0 LED902 1-418-738-11 BLOCK, LIGHT GUIDE PLATE (0.44)
164 8-848-738-01 DEVICE, LENS (LSV-651B) M904 1-763-168-12 ZOOM MOTOR
165 A-7031-114-A RING BLOCK ASSY, MF (SERVICE) M905 1-763-169-12 FOCUS MOTOR

* 166 3-062-200-01 FRAME, LN

Note : Note :
The components identified by Les composants identifiés par
mark 0 or dotted line with mark une marque 0 sont critiques
0 are critical for safety. pour la sécurité.
Replace only with part number Ne les remplacer que par une
specified. pièce portant le numéro spécifié.
6-4
6-1-5. CABINET (L) SECTION
EG
not 205
supplied
SP901 MIC901

212 not
supplied 213
231
202
G F 219
215 202 202 224
F
202 229
230
not E
supplied 226
211 210 223 218 202
not 214
supplied 205
J4002 202
J4001 202
209
205 220
217 G
G
D
C
C B
208 A
205
225 45
(PC5/PC5E) 220 -2
VCard
B o

202 BT4001
C not
supplied
207 221
CN4001 222
227 202
206
216 202 D
203 C
B
A
201 Mechanism deck
204 (See page 6-6 to 6-8)
202
228
: BT4001 (Lithium battery) Control switch block on the mount position. (See page 4-63)

Ref. No. Part No. Description Remarks Ref. No. Part No. Description Remarks
201 3-059-722-01 COVER, CASSETTE COMPARTMENT 219 1-418-925-21 SWITCH BLOCK, CONTROL (PS-30350)(PC4E)
202 3-989-735-11 SCREW (M1.7), LOCK ACE, P2 220 3-062-214-01 SCREW (M1.4X1.5)
203 X-3950-753-1 WINDOW ASSY, NS 221 3-062-210-01 CUSHION, VC
204 A-7074-460-A NS-12 BOARD, COMPLETE 222 A-7096-203-A VC-245 BOARD, COMPLETE (SERVICE)
205 3-713-791-01 SCREW (M1.7X4), TAPPING, P2 (PC5/PC5E:E,HK,AUS,CN,JE)
222 A-7096-277-A VC-245 (P) BOARD, COMPLETE (SERVICE)
206 3-062-198-01 RETAINER, MS CONNECTOR (PC5E:AEP,UK)
207 X-3950-743-1 FRAME ASSY, MD
208 X-3950-742-1 BRACKET (FRONT) ASSY, BELT 222 A-7096-278-A VC-245 (L) BOARD, COMPLETE (SERVICE)
209 3-062-189-02 SCREW (M2.6), SPECIAL HEAD(STEP) (PC4E)
210 3-062-132-01 COVER (HP&S), JACK 223 1-469-833-11 BEAD, FERRITE
* 224 3-062-827-01 SHEET, BJ INSULATING
211 3-062-141-01 BELT, GRIP * 225 3-062-826-01 SHEET, DV INSULATING
212 X-3950-764-1 CABINET (L) ASSY(PC4E) * 226 3-063-395-01 PLATE, G FRAME GROUND
212 X-3950-767-1 CABINET (L) ASSY (GRAY)(PC5/PC5E)
212 X-3950-770-1 CABINET (L) ASSY (BLUE)(PC5/PC5E) * 227 3-062-828-01 SHEET, TERMINAL BOARD
213 X-3950-745-1 RETAINER ASSY, SPEAKER 228 3-059-725-01 LABEL, LS
229 3-062-128-01 SPRING, COMPRESSION
214 3-062-199-01 RETAINER, HP JACK 230 3-062-127-01 LOCK, BATTERY
215 X-3950-765-1 CABINET (G) ASSY (BLUE)(PC4E) 231 3-056-030-11 LOCK ACE (M1.7), 0 PLATE 2 MAIN
215 X-3950-768-1 CABINET (G) ASSY (PC5)
215 X-3950-772-1 CABINET (G) ASSY (PC5E:AEP,UK) BT4001 1-756-075-11 BATTERY, LITHIUM (SECONDARY)
215 X-3950-773-1 CABINET (G) ASSY (PC5E:E,HK,AUS,CN,JE) CN4001 1-794-262-11 CONNECTOR, MEMORY STICK (11P)
(PC5/PC5E)
216 1-418-927-11 SWITCH BLOCK, CONTROL (FK-30350) J4001 1-694-688-11 TERMINAL, S (S VIDEO)
(PC5/PC5E) J4002 1-784-943-41 JACK (SMALL TYPE)(HEADPHONE)
216 1-418-927-21 SWITCH BLOCK, CONTROL (FK-30350)(PC4E) MIC901 1-418-926-11 MICROPHONE BLOCK
217 3-975-921-01 SHEET, VIBRATION PROOF
218 3-062-209-01 SHEET, FIXED SP901 1-529-674-11 SPEAKER (16MM)
219 1-418-925-11 SWITCH BLOCK, CONTROL (PS-30350)
(PC5/PC5E)
6-5
6-1-6. CASSETTE COMPARTMENT AND DRUM BLOCK ASSEMBLY

703

702

704

M901

709
705
701
706
701

LS chassis block
assembly
(See page 6-7)

Mechanism chassis block

assembly
(See page 6-8)
710

707

708 701

Ref. No. Part No. Description Remarks Ref. No. Part No. Description Remarks
701 3-703-816-14 SCREW (M1.4) 707 7-624-102-04 STOP RING 1.5, TYPE -E
702 X-3950-369-2 CASSETTE COMPARTMENT ASSY 708 A-7028-133-B MD (J100) SUB ASSY (K)
703 3-059-082-01 SPRING, TENSION 709 3-703-816-41 SCREW (M1.4X2.5), SPECIAL HEAD
704 3-059-208-01 SPRING (CASSETTE COMPARTMENT T) 710 3-063-036-01 SPACER, WASHER (PS)
705 X-3950-370-3 DAMPER ASSY M901 A-7048-940-A DRUM (DEH-18A-R)

706 3-059-101-03 RETAINER, LS GUIDE

6-6
6-1-7. LS CHASSIS BLOCK ASSEMBLY

752
763
762 765
764 766
761
760 752

759
758
not supplied
757 not supplied
768
not supplied
Q901
756
D901

H902 S903
H901
Q902
772
755 FP-102
(Note) 770
769
773
754
774 771

753
not supplied

752

775

751

Note: FP-102 is included in the LS sub assy and is attached

to chassis by hot-press.
Because installation of FP-102 requires a very high
accuracy, FP-102 is not supplied as an independent
service parts.

Ref. No. Part No. Description Remarks Ref. No. Part No. Description Remarks
751 3-059-173-01 PLATE, LS CAM 766 3-059-093-01 RETAINER, LED
752 3-059-100-01 SCREW (M1.4X1.4), SPECIAL HEAD 768 A-7094-819-A TG7 BLOCK ASSY
753 X-3950-364-1 GEAR ASSY, GOOSENECK 769 3-059-165-01 SPRING (TG7 RETURN), TORSION
754 X-3950-371-1 ARM ASSY, BRAKE (S) DRIVING 770 X-3950-359-1 ARM ASSY, PINCH
755 3-059-166-01 BRAKE (S) 771 3-059-161-01 SPRING (PINCH RETURN), TORSION

756 3-059-146-01 POSITIONING (S), CASSETTE 772 3-059-170-01 BRAKE (T)

757 3-059-167-01 SPRING (BRAKE S), TENSION COIL 773 3-059-171-01 GEAR (T), BRAKE
758 3-059-169-01 SPRING (BRAKE S ARM), TORSION 774 3-059-172-01 SPRING (T), BRAKE
759 3-703-816-14 SCREW (M1.4) 775 A-7094-816-A LS BLOCK ASSY
760 3-059-090-01 SCREW (M1.4X2.5), SPECIAL HEAD D901 8-719-078-71 DIODE LA57A, SO (TAPE LED)

761 X-3950-358-3 TG1 ASSY H901 8-719-067-74 ELEMENT, HOLE HW-105A-CDE-T (S REEL)
762 3-059-156-01 SPRING (TENSION REGULATOR) H902 8-719-067-74 ELEMENT, HOLE HW-105A-CDE-T (T REEL)
763 X-3950-365-2 TABLE ASSY, S REEL Q901 8-729-028-71 TRANSISTOR PN166.SO (TAPE END)
764 X-3950-366-1 TABLE ASSY, T REEL Q902 8-729-028-71 TRANSISTOR PN166.SO (TAPE TOP)
765 X-3950-361-1 PLATE ASSY, RETAINER S903 1-771-326-41 SWITCH, PUSH LEVER (1KEY) (CC DOWN)

6-7
6-1-8. MECHANISM CHASSIS BLOCK ASSEMBLY

815
807
811
822
812
824
813 820

821 823
814

815
816 not
supplied M902 (Including belt)
815 815
M903 810
825

819
809 815
808
818

806
817
807
815
804 829
826

827

805
801
828
803

802
not supplied

Ref. No. Part No. Description Remarks Ref. No. Part No. Description Remarks
801 3-059-211-01 GEAR, CONVERSION 817 X-3950-367-1 GEAR ASSY, MODE
802 3-059-220-01 GEAR, RELAY 818 3-059-139-01 GEAR, GL DRIVING
803 3-059-187-01 SHAFT, WORM 819 3-059-188-01 GEAR, DECELERATION
804 3-059-186-03 HOLDER, MOTOR 820 A-7094-818-A COASTER (S) BLOCK ASSY
805 3-060-002-01 ROLLER, LS GUIDE 821 A-7094-817-A COASTER (T) BLOCK ASSY

806 3-059-189-01 GEAR (A), CAM 822 3-059-126-01 RAIL, GUIDE

807 3-703-816-41 SCREW (M1.4X2.5), SPECIAL HEAD 823 3-962-914-01 SCREW (M1.4X2)
808 3-059-225-01 SHIELD, MOTOR 824 A-7094-822-A DRUM BASE BLOCK ASSY
809 3-059-191-01 ROLLER, LS 825 3-059-118-01 COVER (B), GEAR
810 3-059-190-01 ARM, LS 826 3-059-083-01 COVER (C), GEAR

811 1-677-049-11 FP-228 FLEXIBLE BOARD 827 X-3950-368-1 ARM ASSY, PINCH DRIVING
812 1-677-084-11 FP-100 FLEXIBLE BOARD 828 3-059-192-01 GEAR (B), CAM
813 3-059-149-01 SLIDER, TG1 CAM 829 3-063-355-01 ROLLER (S1), LS GUIDE
814 3-059-148-01 ARM, TG1 DRIVING M902 8-835-685-01 MOTOR, DC SCD18A/C-NP (INCLUDING BELT)
815 3-703-816-14 SCREW (M1.4) CAPSTAN
M903 A-7094-823-A MOTOR BLOCK ASSY, LOADING
816 3-059-117-01 COVER (A), GEAR

6-8
 BJ-1 CF-75

6-2. ELECTRICAL PARTS LIST

NOTE:
• Due to standardization, replacements in the • RESISTORS When indicating parts by reference number,
parts list may be different from the parts All resistors are in ohms. please include the board name.
specified in the diagrams or the components METAL: metal-film resistor
used on the set. METAL OXIDE: Metal Oxide-film resistor The components identified by mark 0 or
• -XX, -X mean standardized parts, so they may F: nonflammable dotted line with mark 0 are critical for safety.
Replace only with part number specified.
have some difference from the original one. • COILS
• Items marked “*” are not stocked since they uH: µH Les composants identifiés par une marque
0 sont critiques pour la sécurité.
are seldom required for routine service. Some • SEMICONDUCTORS
Ne les remplacer que par une pièce portant
delay should be anticipated when ordering these In each case, u: µ, for example: le numéro spécifié.
items. uA...: µA... , uPA... , µPA... ,
• CAPACITORS: uPB... , µPB... , uPC... , µPC... ,
uF: µF uPD..., µPD... CND: Canadian model
• Abbreviation CN: Chinese model
AUS: Australian model HK: Hong Kong model
JE: Tourist model KR: Korea model
Ref. No. Part No. Description Remarks Ref. No. Part No. Description Remarks
A-7074-459-A BJ-1 BOARD, COMPLETE < VARISTOR >
********************
(Ref.No.;30000 Series) VDR311 1-803-742-21 VARISTOR, CHIP
VDR312 1-803-742-21 VARISTOR, CHIP
< CAPACITOR > VDR313 1-803-742-21 VARISTOR, CHIP
VDR315 1-803-742-21 VARISTOR, CHIP
C3101 1-164-937-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.001uF 10% 16V VDR316 1-803-742-21 VARISTOR, CHIP
C3103 1-164-937-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.001uF 10% 16V
VDR319 1-803-742-21 VARISTOR, CHIP
< CONNECTOR > ************************************************************

CN3102 1-794-276-11 CONNECTOR, SQUARE TYPE 4P A-7074-455-A CF-75 BOARD, COMPLETE

CN3103 1-794-403-21 CONNECTOR, BOARD TO BOARD 60P *********************
CN3104 1-794-375-21 PIN, CONNECTOR 2P (Ref.No.;20000 Series)
(IC3201 is not included in this complete board.)
< DIODE >
< CAPACITOR >
D3101 8-719-072-91 DIODE MAZJ200D0LS0
D3102 8-719-056-61 DIODE 015AZ8.2-TPL3 C2201 1-117-919-11 TANTAL. CHIP 10uF 20% 6.3V
D3103 8-719-056-61 DIODE 015AZ8.2-TPL3 C2202 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V
C2203 1-119-923-81 CERAMIC CHIP 0.047uF 10% 10V
< FERRITE BEAD > C3201 1-104-851-11 TANTAL. CHIP 10uF 20% 10V
C3202 1-164-850-11 CERAMIC CHIP 10PF 0.50PF 16V
FB3101 1-500-444-11 FERRITE 0UH
FB3102 1-500-444-11 FERRITE 0UH C3203 1-107-820-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 16V
FB3103 1-500-444-11 FERRITE 0UH C3204 1-119-751-11 TANTAL. CHIP 22uF 20% 16V
FB3104 1-500-444-11 FERRITE 0UH C3207 1-164-939-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.0022uF 10% 16V
FB3105 1-500-444-11 FERRITE 0UH C3208 1-164-004-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 25V
C3452 1-127-895-91 TANTAL. CHIP 22uF 20% 4V
FB3106 1-500-444-11 FERRITE 0UH
C3453 1-127-895-91 TANTAL. CHIP 22uF 20% 4V
< JACK > C3454 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V
C3455 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V
J3101 1-691-737-11 JACK (SMALL TYPE)(EXT MIC) C3456 1-119-923-81 CERAMIC CHIP 0.047uF 10% 10V
J3102 1-793-995-11 JACK, SUPER SMALL TYPE (l LANC) C3457 1-119-923-81 CERAMIC CHIP 0.047uF 10% 10V
J3103 1-778-040-11 JACK, SMALL TYPE (AV JACK)
C3458 1-119-923-81 CERAMIC CHIP 0.047uF 10% 10V
< IC LINK > C3459 1-119-923-81 CERAMIC CHIP 0.047uF 10% 10V
C3460 1-125-817-11 CERAMIC CHIP 10uF 10% 6.3V
0 PS3101 1-576-415-21 FUSE, MICRO (2A)(1608) C3461 1-125-817-11 CERAMIC CHIP 10uF 10% 6.3V
0 PS3102 1-576-415-21 FUSE, MICRO (2A)(1608) C3462 1-125-817-11 CERAMIC CHIP 10uF 10% 6.3V
0 PS3103 1-576-415-21 FUSE, MICRO (2A)(1608)
0 PS3104 1-576-415-21 FUSE, MICRO (2A)(1608) C3463 1-125-817-11 CERAMIC CHIP 10uF 10% 6.3V
C3464 1-110-501-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.33uF 10% 16V
< RESISTOR > C3465 1-127-895-91 TANTAL. CHIP 22uF 20% 4V
C3466 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V
R3101 1-216-864-11 METAL CHIP 0 5% 1/16W
R3102 1-216-864-11 METAL CHIP 0 5% 1/16W < CONNECTOR >
R3103 1-216-864-11 METAL CHIP 0 5% 1/16W
R3105 1-216-864-11 METAL CHIP 0 5% 1/16W CN2201 1-750-346-21 CONNECTOR, FFC/EPC (ZIF) 6P
R3110 1-216-864-11 METAL CHIP 0 5% 1/16W CN2202 1-750-340-21 CONNECTOR, FFC/EPC (ZIF) 16P
CN3351 1-784-421-11 CONNECTOR, FPC (ZIF) 27P
R3111 1-216-864-11 METAL CHIP 0 5% 1/16W CN3353 1-794-411-21 CONNECTOR, FFC/FPC (LIF) 8P
R3112 1-216-864-11 METAL CHIP 0 5% 1/16W CN3354 1-794-404-21 CONNECTOR, BOARD TO BOARD 88P

6-9
 CF-75 FP-102 NS-12 PD-126

Ref. No. Part No. Description Remarks Ref. No. Part No. Description Remarks
< IC > < THERMISTOR >

IC3201 A-7031-011-A CCD BLOCK ASSY (CCD IMAGER)(PC5) TH2201 1-810-812-21 THERMISTOR, NTC (1608)
IC3201 A-7031-012-A CCD BLOCK ASSY (CCD IMAGER)(PC4E/PC5E) ************************************************************
IC3451 8-759-489-19 IC uPC6756GR-8JG-E2
FP-102 FLEXIBLE (Not supplied)
< COIL > **************************
(Ref.No.;4000 Series)
L3201 1-414-757-11 INDUCTOR 100uH
L3451 1-414-771-91 INDUCTOR CHIP 10uH < DIODE >

< TRANSISTOR > D901 8-719-078-71 DIODE LN57A.SO

Q2202 8-729-041-23 TRANSISTOR NDS356AP < HOLE ELEMENT >

Q2203 8-729-037-52 TRANSISTOR 2SC4738F-Y/GR(TPL3)
Q2204 8-729-037-52 TRANSISTOR 2SC4738F-Y/GR(TPL3) H901 8-719-067-74 ELEMENT, HOLE HW-105A-CDE-T
Q2205 8-729-037-52 TRANSISTOR 2SC4738F-Y/GR(TPL3) H902 8-719-067-74 ELEMENT, HOLE HW-105A-CDE-T
Q2206 8-729-037-52 TRANSISTOR 2SC4738F-Y/GR(TPL3)
< TRANSISTOR >
Q2207 8-729-037-74 TRANSISTOR UN9213J-(K8).SO
Q3201 8-729-117-73 TRANSISTOR 2SC4178-F13F14-T1 Q901 8-729-028-71 TRANSISTOR PN166.SO (TAPE END)
Q3202 8-729-037-74 TRANSISTOR UN9213J-(K8).SO Q902 8-729-028-71 TRANSISTOR PN166.SO (TAPE TOP)

< RESISTOR > < SWITCH >

R2201 1-218-985-11 RES-CHIP 470K 5% 1/16W S903 1-771-326-41 SWITCH, PUSH LEVER (1KEY) (CC DOWN)
R2203 1-218-964-11 RES-CHIP 8.2K 5% 1/16W ************************************************************
R2204 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0
R2205 1-218-964-11 RES-CHIP 8.2K 5% 1/16W A-7074-460-A NS-12 BOARD, COMPLETE
R2206 1-218-971-11 RES-CHIP 33K 5% 1/16W *********************
(Ref No.;20000 Series)
R2207 1-218-964-11 RES-CHIP 8.2K 5% 1/16W
R2208 1-218-955-11 RES-CHIP 1.5K 5% 1/16W < DIODE >
R2209 1-218-962-11 RES-CHIP 5.6K 5% 1/16W
R2211 1-218-957-11 RES-CHIP 2.2K 5% 1/16W D003 8-719-061-82 DIODE TLSU1002(TPX1,SONY)
R2212 1-218-937-11 RES-CHIP 47 5% 1/16W D005 8-719-078-78 DIODE DCZ2805
D006 8-719-078-78 DIODE DCZ2805
R2213 1-218-937-11 RES-CHIP 47 5% 1/16W
R2214 1-218-971-11 RES-CHIP 33K 5% 1/16W < IC >
R2215 1-218-977-11 RES-CHIP 100K 5% 1/16W
R2216 1-218-977-11 RES-CHIP 100K 5% 1/16W IC001 8-749-013-13 IC RS-70-TU
R2217 1-218-977-11 RES-CHIP 100K 5% 1/16W ************************************************************

R2218 1-218-977-11 RES-CHIP 100K 5% 1/16W A-7074-456-A PD-126 BOARD, COMPLETE

R3201 1-218-959-11 RES-CHIP 3.3K 5% 1/16W **********************
R3202 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0 (Ref.No.;40000 Series)
R3351 1-218-959-11 RES-CHIP 3.3K 5% 1/16W
R3451 1-218-969-11 RES-CHIP 22K 5% 1/16W < CAPACITOR >

R3452 1-218-969-11 RES-CHIP 22K 5% 1/16W C2101 1-119-750-11 TANTAL. CHIP 22uF 20% 6.3V
R3453 1-218-969-11 RES-CHIP 22K 5% 1/16W C2102 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V
R3454 1-218-969-11 RES-CHIP 22K 5% 1/16W C2103 1-164-943-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 16V
R3455 1-218-965-11 RES-CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W C2104 1-117-919-11 TANTAL. CHIP 10uF 20% 6.3V
R3456 1-218-965-11 RES-CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W C2105 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V

R3457 1-218-989-11 RES-CHIP 1M 5% 1/16W C2107 1-107-826-91 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 16V
R3458 1-218-967-11 RES-CHIP 15K 5% 1/16W C2108 1-164-943-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 16V
R3459 1-218-989-11 RES-CHIP 1M 5% 1/16W C2109 1-164-943-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 16V
C2110 1-164-943-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 16V
< SWITCH > C2111 1-164-739-11 CERAMIC CHIP 560PF 5% 50V

S2201 1-762-805-21 SWITCH, PUSH (1 KEY)(EVF ON/OFF) C2112 1-125-838-91 CERAMIC CHIP 2.2uF 10% 6.3V
C2113 1-164-004-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 25V
< SENSOR > C2114 1-164-943-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 16V
C2115 1-107-687-11 TANTAL. CHIP 3.3uF 20% 20V
SE3450 1-418-682-41 SENSOR, ANGULAR VELOCITY (YAW) C2116 1-164-937-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.001uF 10% 16V
SE3451 1-418-682-21 SENSOR, ANGULAR VELOCITY (PITCH)

Be sure to read “Precautions upon replacing CCD imager”

on page 4-14 when changing the CCD imager.

6-10
 PD-126 PO-5

Ref. No. Part No. Description Remarks Ref. No. Part No. Description Remarks
C2117 1-164-874-11 CERAMIC CHIP 100PF 5% 16V < RESISTOR >
C2118 1-125-838-91 CERAMIC CHIP 2.2uF 10% 6.3V
C2119 1-125-838-91 CERAMIC CHIP 2.2uF 10% 6.3V R2111 1-218-985-11 RES-CHIP 470K 5% 1/16W
C2120 1-125-838-91 CERAMIC CHIP 2.2uF 10% 6.3V R2112 1-218-985-11 RES-CHIP 470K 5% 1/16W
C2123 1-107-687-11 TANTAL. CHIP 3.3uF 20% 20V R2113 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0
R2114 1-218-967-11 RES-CHIP 15K 5% 1/16W
C2124 1-164-943-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 16V R2115 1-218-958-11 RES-CHIP 2.7K 5% 1/16W
C2125 1-163-021-91 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 50V
C2126 1-115-566-11 CERAMIC CHIP 4.7uF 10% 10V R2116 1-218-973-11 RES-CHIP 47K 5% 1/16W
C2127 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V R2117 1-218-975-11 RES-CHIP 68K 5% 1/16W
C2128 1-107-725-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 16V R2118 1-218-969-11 RES-CHIP 22K 5% 1/16W
R2119 1-218-975-11 RES-CHIP 68K 5% 1/16W
C2129 1-216-295-91 SHORT 0 (Note) R2122 1-218-989-11 RES-CHIP 1M 5% 1/16W
C2130 1-164-943-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 16V
C2133 1-109-982-11 CERAMIC CHIP 1uF 10% 10V R2123 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0
C2181 1-128-964-91 TANTAL. CHIP 100uF 20% 6.3V R2124 1-218-977-11 RES-CHIP 100K 5% 1/16W
C2182 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V R2129 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0
R2134 1-218-929-11 RES-CHIP 10 5% 1/16W
C2183 1-128-964-91 TANTAL. CHIP 100uF 20% 6.3V R2136 1-218-929-11 RES-CHIP 10 5% 1/16W
C2184 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V
C2185 1-104-851-11 TANTAL. CHIP 10uF 20% 10V R2137 1-218-929-11 RES-CHIP 10 5% 1/16W
C2186 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V R2138 1-218-941-11 RES-CHIP 100 5% 1/16W
R2143 1-218-965-11 RES-CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W
< CONNECTOR > R2144 1-218-985-11 RES-CHIP 470K 5% 1/16W
R2146 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0
CN2100 1-794-378-21 PIN, CONNECTOR 14P
CN2101 1-794-377-21 PIN, CONNECTOR 8P R2147 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0
* CN2103 1-778-155-11 CONNECTOR, FFC/FPC (ZIF) 7P R2148 1-218-965-11 RES-CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W
* CN2104 1-778-172-11 CONNECTOR, FFC/FPC (ZIF) 24P R2153 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0
CN2105 1-764-704-21 CONNECTOR, FFC/FPC (LIF) 5P R2157 1-218-989-11 RES-CHIP 1M 5% 1/16W
R2158 1-218-975-11 RES-CHIP 68K 5% 1/16W
< DIODE >
R2159 1-218-979-11 RES-CHIP 150K 5% 1/16W
D2101 8-719-073-01 DIODE MA111-TX R2160 1-218-988-11 RES-CHIP 820K 5% 1/16W
D2102 8-713-102-80 DIODE 1T369-01-T8A R2162 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0
D2104 8-719-040-12 DIODE 015Z3.3-TPH3 R2163 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0
D2104 8-719-050-42 DIODE RD3.3UM-T1B R2165 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0
D2181 8-719-059-47 DIODE PG1111R-TR
R2166 1-218-965-11 RES-CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W
< IC > R2168 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0
R2169 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0
IC2101 8-759-660-93 IC RB5P004AM1 R2170 1-218-977-11 RES-CHIP 100K 5% 1/16W
IC2103 8-752-403-84 IC CXD3505R-T4 R2172 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0

< COIL > R2173 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0

R2174 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0
L2101 1-414-755-11 INDUCTOR 22uH R2175 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0
L2102 1-414-754-11 INDUCTOR 10uH R2176 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0
L2103 1-414-754-11 INDUCTOR 10uH R2177 1-218-977-11 RES-CHIP 100K 5% 1/16W
L2104 1-410-998-31 INDUCTOR 2.7uH
L2181 1-412-056-11 INDUCTOR 4.7uH R2178 1-218-977-11 RES-CHIP 100K 5% 1/16W
R2179 1-218-977-11 RES-CHIP 100K 5% 1/16W
L2182 1-414-757-11 INDUCTOR 100uH R2180 1-218-977-11 RES-CHIP 100K 5% 1/16W
R2181 1-218-961-11 RES-CHIP 4.7K 5% 1/16W
< TRANSISTOR > R2182 1-218-953-11 RES-CHIP 1K 5% 1/16W

Q2101 8-729-427-74 TRANSISTOR XP4601-TXE R2183 1-218-941-11 RES-CHIP 100 5% 1/16W

Q2102 8-729-037-74 TRANSISTOR UN9213J-(TX).SO R2184 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0
Q2103 8-729-427-74 TRANSISTOR XP4601-TXE ************************************************************
Q2104 8-729-041-23 TRANSISTOR NDS356AP
Q2109 8-729-037-53 TRANSISTOR 2SB1462J-QR(K8).SO A-7074-457-A PO-5 BOARD, COMPLETE
********************
Q2111 8-729-037-52 TRANSISTOR 2SD2216J-QR(K8).SO (Ref.No.;30000 Series)
Q2112 8-729-048-77 TRANSISTOR XP4313-(TX).SO
Q2181 8-729-042-72 TRANSISTOR UN9214J-(K8).SO < SWITCH >
Q2182 8-729-037-53 TRANSISTOR 2SA1832F-Y/GR(TPL3)
Q2183 8-729-042-59 TRANSISTOR UN9112J-(K8).SO S3501 1-762-805-21 SWITCH, PUSH (1 KEY)(PANEL OPEN)
************************************************************

Note : Short is mounted to the location where C2129 is printed.

6-11
 PR-34 VC-245

Ref. No. Part No. Description Remarks Ref. No. Part No. Description Remarks
A-7074-458-A PR-34 BOARD, COMPLETE A-7096-203-A VC-245 BOARD, COMPLETE
********************** (PC5/PC5E:E,HK,AUS,CN,JE)
(Ref.No;30000 Series) **********************
A-7096-277-A VC-245 BOARD, COMPLETE (PC5E:AEP,UK)
< SWITCH > **********************
A-7096-278-A VC-245 (L) BOARD, COMPLETE (PC4E)
S3601 1-771-338-21 SWITCH, PUSH (PANEL REVERSE) *************************
************************************************************ (Ref.No.;10000 Series)

************************************************************

Electrical parts list of the VC-245 board

are not shown.
pages 6-13 to 6-25 are not shown.

6-12
Ref. No. Part No. Description Remarks Ref. No. Part No. Description Remarks
MISCELLANEOUS 1-475-950-21 REMOTE COMMANDER (RMT-811)
************* (PC5/PC5E:E,HK,AUS,CN,JE)
1-475-950-31 REMOTE COMMANDER (RMT-812)
0 54 1-418-878-11 TRANSFORMER UNIT, INVERTER (PC5E:AEP,UK)
61 1-418-928-11 PANEL, TOUCH (TP-30350) 1-543-798-11 FILTER, CLAMP (FERRITE CORE)
108 1-694-689-11 TERMINAL BOARD, BATTERY (PC4E/PC5E:AEP,UK)
130 1-960-422-11 HARNESS (PR-062) (8P) (2P) 0 1-569-007-11 ADAPTOR, CONVERSION 2P (PC5:JE/PC5E:JE)
131 1-960-421-11 HARNESS (PD-109) (14P) 0 1-569-008-21 ADAPTOR, CONVERSION 2P
(PC5:E,HK/PC5E:E,HK)
164 8-848-738-01 DEVICE, LENS (LSV-651B)
167 1-758-155-21 FILTER BLOCK, OPTICAL (OFB-04-14) 1-573-291-11 CONNECTOR, CONVERSION (21P)
216 1-418-927-11 SWITCH BLOCK, CONTROL (FK-30350) (PC4E/PC5E:AEP,UK)
(PC5/PC5E) * 0 1-575-131-11 CORD, POWER (PC5:E/PC5E:E)
216 1-418-927-21 SWITCH BLOCK, CONTROL (FK-30350)(PC4E) 0 1-696-819-11 CORD, POWER (PC5E:AUS)
219 1-418-925-11 SWITCH BLOCK, CONTROL (PS-30350) 1-765-080-11 CORD, CONNECTION (A/V)(1.5M)
(PC5/PC5E) 0 1-769-608-11 CORD, POWER (PC4E:AEP/PC5E:AEP)

219 1-418-925-21 SWITCH BLOCK, CONTROL (PS-30350)(PC4E) 0 1-776-985-11 CORD, POWER (PC5:KR)
223 1-469-833-11 BEAD, FERRITE 0 1-782-476-11 CORD, POWER (PC5E:CN)
811 1-677-049-11 FP-228 FLEXIBLE BOARD 0 1-783-374-11 CORD, POWER (PC4E:UK/PC5:HK/PC5E:UK,HK)
812 1-677-084-11 FP-100 FLEXIBLE BOARD 1-783-739-22 CORD CONNECTION (DK-115)(PC5/PC5E)
BT4001 1-756-075-11 BATTERY, LITHIUM (SECONDARY) 0 1-790-073-11 CORD, POWER 2P (PC5:JE/PC5E:JE)

CN4001 1-794-262-11 CONNECTOR, MEMORY STICK (11P) 0 1-790-107-22 CORD, POWER (PC5:US,CND)
(PC5/PC5E) 1-792-451-11 CORD WITH CONNECTOR (PC SERIAL CABLE)
D901 8-719-078-71 DIODE LA57A, SO (TAPE LED) (PC5/PC5E)
H901 8-719-067-74 ELEMENT, HOLE HW-105A-CDE-T (S REEL) 3-053-056-01 LID, BATTERY CASE (FOR RMT-811,812)
H902 8-719-067-74 ELEMENT, HOLE HW-105A-CDE-T (T REEL) (PC5/PC5E)
IC3201 A-7031-011-A CCD BLOCK ASSY (CCD IMAGER)(PC5) 3-060-457-11 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION
(PICTURE GEAR 4.1 LITE)(ENGLISH)(PC5:US,CND,E,HK,JE)
IC3201 A-7031-012-A CCD BLOCK ASSY (CCD IMAGER)(PC4E/PC5E) 3-060-457-21 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION
J4001 1-694-688-11 TERMINAL, S (S VIDEO) (PICTURE GEAR 4.1 LITE)(FRENCH)(PC5:CND)
J4002 1-784-943-41 JACK (SMALL TYPE)(HEADPHONE)
LCD901 8-753-050-52 ACX300CK-J 3-060-457-31 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION
LCD902 8-753-026-74 LCX032AK-J (PC4E) (PICTURE GEAR 4.1 LITE)(TRADITIONAL CHINESE)
(PC5:E,HK/PC5E:HK)
LCD902 8-753-026-77 LCX033AK-J (PC5/PC5E) 3-060-457-41 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION
0 LED902 1-418-738-11 BLOCK, LIGHT GUIDE PLATE (0.44) (PICTURE GEAR 4.1 LITE)(KOREAN)(PC5:KR,JE)
M901 A-7048-940-A DRUM (DEH-18A-R) 3-060-458-11 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION
M902 8-835-685-01 MOTOR, DC SCD18A/C-NP (INCLUDING BELT) (PICTURE GEAR 4.1 LITE)(ENGLISH,RUSSIAN)(PC5E)
CAPSTAN 3-060-458-21 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION
M903 A-7094-823-A MOTOR BLOCK ASSY, LOADING (PICTURE GEAR 4.1 LITE)(FRENCH,GERMAN)
(PC5E:AEP,E,JE)
M904 1-763-168-12 ZOOM MOTOR 3-060-458-31 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION
M905 1-763-169-12 FOCUS MOTOR (PICTURE GEAR 4.1 LITE)(ITALIAN,DUTCH)(PC5E:AEP)
MIC901 1-418-926-11 MICROPHONE BLOCK
0 ND901 1-517-931-11 TUBE, FLUORESCENT,COLD CATHODE 3-060-458-41 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION
Q901 8-729-028-71 TRANSISTOR PN166.SO (TAPE END) (PICTURE GEAR 4.1 LITE)(SPANISH,PORTUGUESE)
(PC5:E.JE/PC5E:E)
Q902 8-729-028-71 TRANSISTOR PN166.SO (TAPE TOP) 3-060-458-61 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION
S903 1-771-326-41 SWITCH, PUSH LEVER (1KEY) (CC DOWN) (PICTURE GEAR 4.1 LITE)(ARABIC,PERSIAN)
SP901 1-529-674-11 SPEAKER (16MM) (PC5:E/PC5E:E)
************************************************************ 3-060-458-71 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION
(PICTURE GEAR 4.1 LITE)(SIMPLIFIED CHINESE)
ACCESSORIES (PC5E:E,CN,JE)
************ 3-060-476-01 DISK, SYSTEM (PICTURE GEAR 4.1 LITE)
(PC5/PC5E)
1-475-141-31 COMMANDER, REMOTE (RMT-809)(PC4E) 3-062-114-11 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (ENGLISH)
0 1-475-851-22 ADAPTOR, AC (AC-VF10)(PC5:US,CND) (PC5:US,CND,E,HK,JE)
0 1-475-851-33 ADAPTOR, AC (AC-VF10)
(PC4E/PC5:E,HK,JE/PC5E:AEP,UK,E,HK,AUS,JE) 3-062-114-21 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (FRENCH)(PC5:CND)
0 1-475-851-71 ADAPTOR, AC (AC-VF10)(PC5:KR) 3-062-114-31 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION
0 1-475-851-81 ADAPTOR, AC (AC-VF10)(PC5E:CN) (SPANISH,PORTUGUESE)(PC5:E,JE)
3-062-114-41 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION
(TRADITIONAL CHINESE)(PC5:E,HK)
3-062-114-51 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (KOREAN)(PC5:KR,JE)
3-062-114-61 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (ARABIC)(PC5:E)

Note : Note :
Be sure to read “Precautions upon replacing CCD imager” The components identified by Les composants identifiés par
on page 4-14 when changing the CCD imager. mark 0 or dotted line with mark une marque 0 sont critiques
0 are critical for safety. pour la sécurité.
Replace only with part number Ne les remplacer que par une
specified. pièce portant le numéro spécifié.
6-26
Ref. No. Part No. Description Remarks
3-062-115-11 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (ENGLISH,RUSSIAN)
(PC5E:AEP,UK)
3-062-115-21 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (FRENCH,GERMAN)
(PC4E:AEP/PC5E:AEP)
3-062-115-31 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION
(SPANISH,PORTUGUESE)(PC4E:AEP/PC5E:AEP)
3-062-115-41 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (ITALIAN,DUTCH)
(PC4E:AEP/PC5E:AEP)
3-062-116-11 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (ENGLISH, RUSSIAN)
(PC5E:E,AUS,HK,CN,JE)

3-062-116-21 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (FRENCH, GERMAN)

(PC5E:E,JE)
3-062-116-31 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (ABABIC, PERSIAN)
(PC5E:E)
3-062-116-41 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION
(SIMPLIFIED CHINESE)(PC5E:E,CN,JE)
3-062-116-51 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION
(TRANDITIONAL CHINESE)(PC5E:HK)
3-742-854-21 LID, BATTERY CASE (FOR RMT-809)(PC4E)

3-967-386-11 CLEANING CLOTH

A-7033-740-A MEMORY STICK (MSA-4A)(PC5/PC5E)

6-27E
〈OPTICAL AXIS FRAME〉

Take a copy of OPTICAL AXIS

FRAME with a clear sheet for use.
✂

— 198 —
 〈FOR CAMERA COLOR REPRODUCTION ADJUSTMENT〉

For NTSC model

DCR-PC5
Take a copy of CAMERA COLOR
REPRODUCTION FRAME with
a clear sheet for use.

✂
For PAL model

DCR-PC4E/PC5E
✂

— 199 —
DCR-PC4E/PC5/PC5E

Sony Corporation
2000E1634-1
9-929-832-31 Personal VIDEO Products Company Printed in Japan ©2000.5
— 200 — Published by Safety & Service Engineering Dept.